航海英语历届真题36-52

1. Where would you find information about the time of high tide at a specific location on a particular day of the year?

A. Tide Tables B. Tidal Current Tables C. Coast Pilot D. Nautical Almanac

2. For details of these and other lights the larger scale charts and Admiralty Lists should be __ A. considered B. consulted C. concluded D. commanded

3. The error in the measurement of the altitude of a celestial body, caused by refraction,increases as the ______.

A. horizontal parallax decreases B. observer‘s height above sea level increases C. humidity of the atmosphere decreases D. altitude of the body decreases 4. The compass rose on a nautical chart indicates both variation and ______.

A. deviation

B. annual rate of variation change C. precession D. compass error

5. The short-long dashed, magenta lines parallel to York River Entrance Channel mark _____ A. fish trap areas B. naval exercise areas C. underwater cables D. recommended track lines

6.An important point to note when you open a navigation chart is to note whether the depths are_____

A in meter or fathom B in foot or kilometer C by meter or fathom D by foot or kilometer 7.When should voyage planning be done? A. During the sailing B. Prior the sailing C. After sailing

D. Before the pilot is leaving

8. The Experimental Lighthouse-buoy has no navigational significance and may be removed at will．The above sentence means ______.

A. It's of no use for navigation and would be removed with notice B. It's useful in navigation and may be removed without notice C. It's helpless in navigation and may be removed without notice D. It's helpful in navigation and may be removed without notice

9. Owing to old data of the survey the positions and number of the beacons shown on this chart are not to be ______. A. considered B. insured C. relied upon D. suspected

10. ______ is a full nautical record of a ship's voyage，written up at the end of each watch by the officer of the watch.

A. Sea Protest B. Deck Log C. Accident Report D. Seaman's Book 11.When there is not a chief officer on board, ______should keep and write up the ship‘s logbook. A the assistant officer B the captain C the officer on duty D the third officer

12.The port gangway caught on a ______on the wharf and was severely damaged. A bollard B bitt C stem D keel

13. Do you need to measure oxygen levels before entering an enclosed space? A. Yes, always B. No

C. Not if you measure for toxic gases

D. Yes, but not if you ventilate properly first for 24 hours

14. Who must ensure that the emergency lighting and power systems on cargo vessels are operated at least weekly?______

A. Master B. Chief Engineer C. Deck officer assigned D. Engineering officer assigned 15. Painting on _________is prohibited because it will weaken its sensibility A.ship shell

B.exterior of winches C.hydrostatic release unit D.hold ladders

16. You are on watch at night in clear visibility and the vessel has just been anchored. The first thing that you should do after the anchor has been let go is to ______.

A. stop the engines B. turn off the running lights and turn on the anchor lights C. take at least two bearings of prominent shore lights D. lower the accommodation ladder and illuminate it 17.the port of registry is ______.

A not required to be marked anywhere on the vessel B required to be marked on both bows

C required to be marked anywhere on the stern with the name of vessel marked on both bows D required to be marked anywhere on the keel, stern , and both bows

18.On a rigid liferaft which is equipped with all of the required equipment you may not find a______ A bailer B sponge C whistle D fishing kit

19. Shipboard Emergency Drills must be carried out at least _____on board cargo ship A. Once every third year B. Once a month C. Once a year D. Once a week

20.Ship‘ masters are requested to ensure that ,while their vessels are calling at this port ,all discharge outlets are_____

A opened B kept half opened C blocked up D kept half closed 21.What is a CORRECT reply to a pilot‘s request, How‘s your heading? A Steady B Eased to 10 rudder C checked D Passing 50

22. Your vessel is docking, but not yet alongside. Which line will be the most useful when maneuvering the vessel alongside the pier?______.

A. Bow breast line B. Bow spring line C. Inshore head line D. Offshore head line 23. It's all right to rig the pilot ladder on lee side ______. A. to allow port Authorities to board B. allowing port Authorities to board C. to allow port Authorities boarding

D. allowing port Authorities to be boarded

24. Generally speaking，the most favorable bottom for anchoring is ______. A. very soft mud B. rocky

C. a mixture of mud and clay D. loose sand

25. Your ship is steaming at night with the gyropilot engaged. You notice that the vessel‘s course is slowly changing to the right. Which action should you take FIRST?______.

A. switch to hand steering. B shift the steering to the emergency steering station. C. Call the Master D. Notify the engine room of the steering malfunction. 26. A vessel fitted with twin screws is easier in ______ than a vessel

with single screw． A. turning maneuver B. course setting C. position fixing D. regulating speed

27.The officer of the watch should______ comply with the Collision Rules. A some times B often C at all times D seldom 28.Your vessel is underway when______

A her is dredging B her anchor is used in docking

C she is dredging her anchor D her anchor holds fast while she is swinging 29. Risk of collision is considered to exist if ______. A. four vessels are nearby

B. a vessel has a steady bearing at a constant range C. there is any doubt that a risk of collision exists D. a special circumstance situation is apparent

30.A vessel underway and fishing shall keep out of the way a ______ A power-driven vessel underway B vessel not under command C vessel sailing D vessel engaged on pilotage duty

31.Which one of two crossing power-driven vessels has the right of way in a fog?

A Both vessel B Neither vessel C The vessel on portside D The vessel on starboard side 32. What is a lighted safe water mark fitted with to aid in its identification ? ______ A. A spherical topmark B. Red and white retroreflective material C. Square triangular topmarks D. A red and white octagon 33. A dead reckoning (DR) plot ______. A. ignores the effect of surface currents B. is most useful when in sight of land C. must be plotted using magnetic courses D. may be started at an assumed position

34. There is sufficient anchorage for ______ at all time around the No．1 buoy and for smaller vessels around the No．4 buoy． A. deep laded vessels B. deeply load vessels C. deep loading vessels

D. deeply loaded vessels

35. A tide is called diurnal when ______.

A. only one high and one low water occur during a lunar day B. the high tide is higher and the low tide is lower than usual C. the high tide and low tide are exactly six hours apart D. two high tides occur during a lunar day

36.A height of a tide can be increased by ______

A a storm surge B a high pressure area C the jet stream D two high tides 37. All the holds and other parts of the ship in which cargo is to be stowed should be ______ for the carriage． A. comfortable B. suitable C. stable D. favorable

38. If the buoyant force on a ship's hull is equal to the displacement tonnage，the ship will ______. A. require ballast

B. be down by the head C. sink D. float

39. Reducing the liquid free surfaces in a vessel reduces the ______. A. roll period

B. metacentric height C. waterplane area D. vessel's draft

40. The productivity of working shifts can be improvedРth?ough a decrease of ______.??同原题库2404

A. working hours B. gangs C. idle time

D. weight per set

41. What is the main purpose of dunnage?

A. To act as ballast for light vessels B. To provide ventilation and drainage for cargo C. To secure the tarpaulins in place D. To support weakened bulkheads

42. How should you signal the crane operator to lower the boom and raise the load? A. Extend arm and point finger in the direction to move the boom

B. Extend arm with thumb pointing downward and flex fingers in and out

C. With forearm vertical and forefinger pointing up, move hand in small horizontal circles

D. With arm extended downwards and forefinger pointing down, move hand in small horizontal circles

43. The forward draft of your ship draft is 27‘11‖ and the after is 29‘03‖. The draft amidship is 28‘05‖. Your vessel is ______.

A. Hogged B. Sagged C. Listed D. Trimmed by the head 44.The man directing and supervising the work of stevedores is the______

A local agent B watchman C docker D foreman

45. The ship is now too much listing to portside. I suggest that you ______ light cargo on portside and heavy cargo on starboard side.

A. will put B. would put C. put D. shall put 46. Figure of cargo short-landed in ______. A. dispute B. argue C. debate D. discuss

47.The speed at which storm center moves is the ______

A speed of movement B speed of advance C speed of storm D storm movement speed 48. TYPHOON FORECAST MOVE 285 DEG 15 KNOT FIRST 12 HOURS THEN 280 DEG 17 KNOTS NEXT 12 HOURS. The movement of the Typhoon is in ______ quadrant. A. NE B. SE C. NW D. SW

49.When a wind is permanently changing the direction from which it blows, the ______ A variable B changing C backing D veering

50. The rise and fall of the ocean‘s surface due to a distant storm is known as ______ A sea B waves C fetch D swell

51. Good weather is usually associated with a region of ______. A. low barometric pressure B. high barometric pressure C. falling barometric pressure D. pumping barometric pressure

52. A DECK，SPACE，AREA，ETC.，NOT PERMITTED TO BE ENTERED FOR SAFETY REASONS defines ______. A. Restricted area B. Closed area C. Prohibited place D. Forbidden place

53 ___is halfway between the forward and after perpendiculars and is reference point for vessel construction.

A:Half length B: Mid-body C: Center line D: Amidships 54 Roll-on /roll-off ships are equipped with C A: Cargo elevators B: conveyor belts

C: ramps D: derricks and winches for cargo handling

55 The Port-Off-Stbd‘ selector switch on an autopilot steering stand is used to________ A change from hand electric steering to automatic gyro B Change over one steering system to the other

C change over hand electric steering to non-follow-up D change over the port to the starboard bow thruster 56 Increasing the area of anchor flukes will_______ A: increase holding power B: decrease holding power

C: make penetration more complete D: not effect holding power

57 The last shot of an anchor cable is usually painted________ A: white B: international orange C: yellow D: red

58 The officer of the watch should use radar when appropriate and at all times in______water A: congesting B: congested C: congestion D: congest 59 The common way to obtain your ship‘s position is ____ A: keeping a close watch and lookout B: taking a radar range and bearing

C: observing a radar target and listening to signals D; keeping a well clear caution

60 The minimum range at which a target can be detected is basically determined by which of the following?____

A: persistence B: pulse repetition rate C: pulse length D: rotation rate

61 If the compass heading and the magnetic heading are the same then_______ A: the deviation has been offset by the variation B: there is something wrong with the compass

C: the compass is being influenced by nearby metals D: there is no deviation on that heading

62 Magnetic heading differs from compass heading by_____ A: compass error B: true heading C: variation D:deviation

63 Before switching on gyro-compass, you should make sure that the power supply on board is ________

A: high or low B: AC or DC C；strong or weak D；on or off The GPS satellite orbits the earth in approximately_______ A: 3 hours B: 6 hours C: 12 hours D: 24 hours

65 What is important to remember when using AIS for collision avoidance? A: AIS may not give a complete picture of the traffic situation B: AIS is more accurate than ARPA C AIS is not as accurate as ARPA

D: AIS is not allowed to be used for collision avoidance

66 With respect to automatic identification systems(AIS) which of the following information is broadcast every one to ten seconds? A: Vessel‘s draft B: Air Draft

C: Navigational status D: Dimensions of vessel

67 The Emergency Position Indicating Radiobeacon on a cargo vessel must be stowed________ A: in an inside passageway B: in an approved bracket C: so that it is accessible from the bridge of the vessel D: so that it will float free the vessel sinks

68 On which vessel is GMDSS required A: All vessel capable of international voyages

B: Vessel operating outside of the range of VHF coastal radio stations C: SOLAS convention ship of 300 gross tonnage or more

D: Coastal vessel of less than 300 gross tons

69 The generators on your ship have shut down, leaving you without navigation lights. Which emergency signal would you transmit over the VHF radio to alert vessels in the area of your predicament?

A: Mayday Mayday Mayday B: Pan Pan Pan

C: Security Security Security

D：Lights out Lights out Lights out

70 The pilot station______close west of the end of the breakwater A: stayed B: situated C: placed D: located

71 VHF Channel 6 is used exclusively for______communications A:radio checks and time checks

B; inter-vessel safety and search and rescue C; working with helicopters D; radio direction finding

72 One hour before arrival at Elbe l light vessel, masters are advised to contact the pilot boat by __________

A: telephone B: telegraph C: telex D: VHF 73 A bollard is found on the ________ C A: beach B: deck C: pier D; towed vessel

74 In order to correctly open a new coil of manila line, you should_______ A: pull the tagged end from the top of the coil B; pull the tagged end through the eye of the coil C: secure the outside end and unroll the coil D: unreel the coil from a spool

75 Separating both blocks of a tackle to prepare it for reuse is called_______ A: chockablocking B: out-hauling C: over-hauling D; two-blocking

76 Which splice should you use in order to make a permanent loop in a line?

A: Back splice B: Eyc splice C: Long splice D; Short splice

77 The end of the joint with the exterior threads is called the______ A: pin B; stem C; box D; stand

78 If you saw flames aboard a vessel but could see the vessel was not on fire, you would know that the_______

A: crew was trying to get warm

B: vessel required immediate assistance

C; vessel was attempting to attract the attention of a pilot boat D: vessel was being illuminated for identification by aircraft 79 A search and rescue region is ________

A: a search area B: an area covered by air surveillance

C: an area covered by radar surveillance D; an area of defined dimensions 80.What is the meaning of UEL? A.Upper exposure level B.Upper explosion level

C.Upper explosive limit D.Upper evaporation level

81. . For most products the fire will die out when the oxygen content is reduced to _____. A. 10% B. 12% C. 15% D. 21%

82. A self-contained breathing apparatus is used to ______. A. make underwater repairs to barges

B. determine if the air in a tank is safe for men

C. enter areas that may contain dangerous fumes or lack oxygen D. resuscitate an unconscious person KEY: C

83. Making water rapidly in all holds，all passengers and crew were ordered on deck ______ and all boats were lowered to rail. A. in life jackets B. with life jackets C. with life jackets on D. putting on life jackets

84. After abandoning a vessel, water that is consumed within the first 24 hours will ______. A. pass through the body with little absorbed by the system B. help to prevent fatigue-

C. quench thirst for only 2 hours D. help to prevent seasickness

85. After launching，an inflatable raft should be kept dry inside by ______.

A. opening the automatic drain plugs B. draining the water pockets C. using the electric bilge pump

D. using the bailers and cellulose sponge 86. What does OBO mean? A. Oil Bulk Oil B. Ore Bulk Oil C. Only Bulk Ore D. Only Basic Oil

87.When a person is in shock,their skin will be _____ A.warm and dry B.warm and damp C.cold and dry D.cold and damp

88. What is the proper first aid for LPG in the eye? A. Apply an ice pack to the eye. B. Keep the eyelid closed.

C. Flush the eye with plenty of water. D. Rub the eye area clean.

(一)

Major coast radio stations all over the world transmit，at regular intervals and in code， weather information for ships within range. Weather information consists of ten parts， of which ships usually make use of three，that is，warning，synoptic situation and forecast. With weather information，mariners are able to keep away from disastrous weather at sea and reduce the danger a great deal. As terrible weather is predicted，ships can take precautions beforehand，by delaying the voyage or seeking shelter in a safe

place. If there is a high sea or a long swell，they can take some measures to safeguard the cargo and the ship.

Weather information for ships is usually transmitted by coast radio stations ___. A. any time of the day B. at fixed time

C. in different languages D. in some parts of the world

KEY：B

90 Coast radio stations generally provide weather information for ships ___. I. in code, II. In a certain language, III. in written form

A. I B. I + II C. II D. I + II + III KEY:A

91 Weather information usually tells people something about weather _____. A. afterwards B. in advance

C. at the same time D. when there‘s bad weather KEY:B

92 Of the following, ______ is not the way for ships to keep away from bad weather. A. delaying voyage B. staying in port C. speeding up and running away D. pumping out ballast water KEY:D

(二)

Passage 3-5

短距离通信

Communications over relatively short distances can be made by visual or sound signals. Visual signals can be sent by using flags or an Aldis lamp. An Aldis lamp is an electric lamp used for flashing messages in Morse code. The traditional method of signaling from one ship to another is by using flags. There are different colored flags for each letter of the alphabet. There are also pennant-shaped flags for numbers，and a long pennant，known as an answering or code pennant. Three other flags，which are burgee-shaped，are known as substitutes. These show that the flat or pennant is being repeated. Besides standing for a letter of the alphabet，each flag，when hoisted along，has another meaning. For example，the \"W\" flag also means: \"I require medical assistance\". Flags can also be hoisted in combinations of two，three or four. Siren，whistle，bell or other sound signals can be used in fog and similar circumstances when visual signals can not be seen.

[93]Communications over relatively short distances may be made by ________. 通信相关的距离相当短，可以不是视觉就是声号。 A. visual signals B. sound signals C. Morse Code

D. Either visual or sound signals

#D

[94]An Aldis lamp is used for ________.

一个手提闪光信号的被用在莫尔斯密码发送上。 A. transmitting Morse code B. flashing flags

C. sending flag signals D. sending sound signals #A

[95]Burgee-shaped flags are used as substitutes to show ________.

燕尾旗是用来代替显示 重复的 A. \"repeating\" B. \"answering\" C. \"code\" pennant

D. \"I requiring medical assistance\" #A

[96]________ are used in fog and similar circumstances when visual signals can not be seen. 这个船的汽笛，口哨或者钟是用在雾和类似环境当视觉不能看到时候。 A. Visual signals B. Substitutes

C. Pennant-shaped flags

D. The ship's siren，whistle or bell #D

题号--答案 1--A 6--A 11--B 16--B 21--C 26--A 31--B 36--A 41--B 46--A 51--B 56--A 61--D 66--C 71--B 题号--答案 2--B 7--B 12--A 17--C 22--B 27--C 32--A 37--B 42--B 47--B 52--A 57--D 62--D 67--D 72--D 题号--答案 3--D 8--C 13--A 18--D 23--A 28--D 33--A 38--D 43--A 48--C 53--D 58--B 63--B 68--C 73--C 题号--答案 4--B 9--C 14—A 19--B 24--C 29--C 34--D 39--A 44--D 49--B 54-- C 59--B --C 69--C 74--B 题号--答案 5--A 10--B 15--C 20--C 25--A 30--B 35--A 40--C 45--C 50--D 55--B 60--C 65--A 70--B 75--C 76--B 81--B 86--B 77--A 82--B 87--D 78--B 83--C 88--C 79--D 84--A --BABD 80--C 85--D 90--DAAD 51期 903机考题目汇编 1. Where would you find information about the time of high tide at a specific location on particular day of the year?

A. Tide Tables B. Tidal Current Tables C. Coast Pilot D. Nautical Almanac

2. When a buoy is in position only during a certain period of the year, where may the dates when the buoy is in position be found?

A. Light List B. Notice to Mariners C. On the chart D. Coast Pilot 3. For working details ______ Admiralty list of Radio Signal. A. refer B. see C. watch D. look

4. The only cylindrical chart projection widely used for navigation is in the ______ . A. Lambert conformal B. Mercator C. azimuthal D. gnomonic

5. A true bearing of a charted object , when plotted on a chart, will establish a ______ . A. fix B. line of position C. relative bearing D. range

6. Many of the soundings shown on the chart are derived from ______ , Undue reliance should not be placed upon them.

A. complete and often very poor surveys B. correct and often very good surveys C. inadequate and often very old surveys C. adequate and present surveys 7. In revised editions of Admirlty chars the ______ are corrected first.

A. smaller scales B. larger scales C. smaller scales and larger scales D. moderate scales 8.Navigate with ______ . Small fishing boats are within 0.8mile of me. A. careful B. skill C. concern D. caution

9. The Admiralty Notices to Mariners can be obtained ______ by Masters of vessels from any Admiralty Chart Agent.

A. free of charge B. with on responsibility C. without limitations of distribution D. with little charges

10. All entries in Logbook, ______ made, must not be erased or amended.

11.When a vessel is entering or leaving a port, a record of engine speeds is kept in the ______. A. bell book B. deck rough logbook C. Official Logbook D. engine rough log

12. I must hold _____for any damage which may have resulted from the accidents you caused. A. your responsible B. you responsible C. you are responsible D. your are responsible

13. ______ the torn bags of castor seeds you mentioned we have already replaced them by new ones. A. Regard B. Regards C. Regarded D. Regarding 14. Who can suggest changes to the SMS? A. The designated person B. The captain C. All officers and crew D, All senior officer 15. Have the safety belts for _____been examined?

A. total enclosed lifeboats B. totally enclosing lifeboats C. totally enclosed lifeboats C. total enclosing lifeboats

16. If the officer on watch is in any doubt as to the pilot‘s actions, or intentions, he should _______ . A. notify the Captain as soon as possible B. seek clarification from the pilot C. take action by

his own judgment D. cease the duty of pilot‘s at once

17. How many operators are needed/required on board according to the provisions of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974_____? A. 4 operators B. 3 operators C. 2 operators D. 1 operator

18. In _____ convention, a vessel which carries more than 12 passengers shall be deemed as a passenger ship.

A. COSCO B. STCW C. COLAS D. MARPOL

19. Vessels carrying _____ must not willfully wash decks or holds. A. general B. steel products C. harmful cargo D. machinery 20. How to determine the density of the slop after tank washing? A. By use of an interferometer B. By use of a hydrometer C. By use of an interface D. By use of a thermometer 21. In anchoring orders, UPAND DOWN means ______.

A. the chain is not upright B. the chain is tight C. the chain is upright D. the chain is slack 22.The ideal rope for stoppers should satisfy the following requirements except that______. A. The stopper should be of synthetic fibre rope

B. The size of the stopper should be as large as possible C. The stopper should be of low stretch material D. The stopper should be very flexible

23.You are docking a vessel.Wind and current are most favorable when they aye ________. A. crossing your course in the same direction B. crossing your course in opposite directions C. parallel to the pier from ahead D. setting you on the pier

24. If your vessel is dragging her anchor in a strong wind, you should _____.

A. shorten the scope of anchor cable B. increase the scope of anchor cable C. put over the sea anchor D. put over a stern anchor

25. What is ship‘s heading? Ship‘s heading is the direction____. A. the vessel is pointing

B. the vessel is traveling relative to land C. the vessel is traveling relative to ground D. the vessel is drifting

26. The side of a ship which is farther from the winds is ______. A. fairway side B. open sea side C. lee side

D. roadstead side

27. A vessel is in sight of another vessel when ______. A. she can be observed by radar

B. she can be observed visually from the other vessel

C. she can be plotted on radar well enough to determine her heading D. her fog signal can be heard

28. Which vessel is ―underway‖ under the Rules of the Road? A. A vessel at anchor with the engine running B. A vessel with a line led to a tree onshore C. A vessel drifting with the engine off D. A vessel aground

29.In determining a safe speed-----shall not be among those into account.

A、the characteristics,efficiency and limitation of the radar equipment B、any constraints imposed by the radar scale in use

C、the effect on radar detection of the sea state,weather and other sources of interference D、the safe working load of the cranes both on board and ashore

30.Underway at night you see the red sidelight of a vessel well off your port bow. Which statement is TRUE?______.

A. You are required to alter course to the right. B. You must stop engines.

C. You are on a collision course with the other vessel. D. You may maintain course and speed. 31.In case of your steering gear failed,_____should be exhibited in shapes or lights

A、 not under command B、restricted in her ability C、restrained by her draught D、underway 32.The four standard light colors used for lighted aids to navigation are red，green，white，and ___ __．

A．purple B．orange C．blue D．yellow

33.When should a navigator rely on the position of floating aids to navigation?

A、 During calm weather only B、During daylight only C、Only when inside a habor D、Only when fixed aids are not available

34.A line on the Earth parallel to the equator is a____.

A、gnomonic curve B、small circle C、meridian D、great circle

35.When there are small differences between the heights of two successive high tides or two successive low tides，the tides are called ____．

A．Diurnal B．Semi-diurnal C．Solar D．Mixed

36.The average time between two high waters is 12 hours and 25 minutes because this is the time it takes for____.

A.The sun to be at the opposite side of the moon B.The moon to be at the opposite side of the earth C.The moon to be at its apogee

D.The sun and the moon to be on the same side

37.All the hold and other parts of the ship in which cargo is to be stowed should be _____ for the carriage.

A、comfortable B、suitable C、stable D、favorable 38.A vessel with a large GM will ______.

A. have more resistance to listing in case of damage B. have less tendency to have synchronous rolling C. be less likely to have cargo shift D. ride more comfortably

39.Buoyancy is a measure of the ship's _____

A、ability to float B、deadweight C、freeboard D、midships strength 40.My ship is _____ NO.5 berth for loading.

A、onto the wharf B、moved astern C、into the dock D、moored alongside 41.What is the main purpose of dunnage?

A. To act as ballast for light vessels B. To provide ventilation and drainage for cargo

C. To secure the tarpaulins in place D. To support weakened bulkheads

42. The Master or person in charge of a ship shall ensure the crane record book shows ______. A. the name of the crane operator B. an entry each time the crane is used C. date and result of each rated load test D. the time of day of the test 43. In order to determine the trimming arm for your vessel at any

particular draft，which of the following would you compare？ ______. A. Longitudinal center of buoyancy and longitudinal center of gravity． B. Longitudinal center of floatation and longitudinal center of gravity． C. Longitudinal center of floatation and longitudinal center of buoyancy． D. Longitudinal tipping center and longitudinal center of gravity

44．Inflammable cargo ______ in the holds adjacent to the engine room． A. shall never be stowed B. may be stowed C. can be stowed D. should be stowed

45. Please arrange for the workers to do the ______ work during loadingthe trucks and heavy cargo on the ship，and also supply the necessary materials for the work． A. lashing B. shifting C. lifting D. tallying

46．Foreman, the ship ______ , please get the stevedores to fill the port wings with heavier packages. A. lists to starboard B. is shifting to starboard C. is inclined to starboard D. is listing to starboard

47. If the center of low pressure is due west of you in the Northern Hemisphere, which wind direction should you expect?

A. South to west B. South to east C. West to north D. North to east 48. LOW AT 34N 135E ESLY SLWLY INTST NC．This description is most likely to be under the heading of ______. A. GALE WNG B. GEN SYN C. STORM WNG D. TYPHOON WNG

49. In the doldrums you can expect ______. A. steady，constant winds

B. frequent rain showers and thunderstorms C. steep pressure gradients D. low relative humidity

50. In most cases，the direction of the apparent wind lies between the bow and ______.

A. the direction of the true wind B. true north

C. the beam on the windward side D. the beam on the lee side

51. A frontal thunderstorm is caused by ______. A. pronounced local heating

B. wind being pushed up a mountain

C. a warm air mass rising over a cold air mass

D. an increased lapse rate caused by advection of warm surface air

52.Which is an advantage of using watertight longitudinal divisions in double bottom tanks? A.Cuts down free surface effect B.Increases the rolling period C.Decreases weight because extra stiffeners are unneeded D.Lowers the center of buoyancy without decreasing GM

53. _____is halfway between the forward and after perpendiculars and is a reference point for vessel construction. A.Half length B.Mid-body C.Center line D.Amidships 54.Where is the keel generally located on a ship? A.Along the mid ships axis B.Along the centerline of the lower hulls C.Along the roll axis of the hull D.Along the axis of rotation of the hull

55 On an anchor windlass, the wheel over which the anchor chain passes is called a______ A: brake compressor wheel B: devil‘s claw C: wildcat D: winchead

56 The holding capability of an anchor is primarily determined by the_______ A: shape of the anchor B: stowage of the anchor on board C: anchor‘s ability to dig in D: size of the vessel and its draft 57 BHP stands for the_____of the main engine A: breadth dimension B:builder‘s name

C: brake horsepower D: revolutions per minute

58Your radar is set on a true motion display. Which of the following will NOT appear to move across the PPI scope?_____

A: Echoes from a buoy B: Own ship‘s marker

C: Echo from a ship on the same course at the same speed D: Echo from a ship on a reciprocal course at the same speed 59 The common way to obtain your ship‘s position is_______ A :keeping a close watch and lookout B: taking a radar range and bearing

C: observing a radar target and listening to signals D: keeping a well clear caution

60 Radar makes it possible and much safer for us to sail______

A: in dense fog B: in boisterous weather c:in the open sea D: in rivers 61 Deviation in a compass is caused by the________ A: vessel‘sgeographic position B: vessel‘s heading C: vessel‘smagnetic field

D:influence of the magnetic materials of the vessel

62 Before switching on gyro-compass, you should make sure that power supply on board is____ A;high or low B: AC or DC C: longitude D: on or off 63 Ddeviation changes with a change in_________

A: latitude B; heading C: longitude D; sea conditions

Automatic identification systems(AIS) are expected to broadcast all of the following information EXCEPT______

A: navigation status B: ship‘s heading C:port of origin D: time stamp

65 The GPS satellite orbits the earth in approximately_______ A: 3 hours B: 6 hours C:12hours D:24 hours

66 What may affect the accuracy of sounding with echo sounder? A: sea bottom B; ship‘s speed

C: speed of current D: water temperature and density

67 The principal advantage of NAVTEX radio warning is that__ A: they can be used by mariners who do not know Morse code B: only an ordinary FM radio is necessary to receive these warnings C: information on a given topic is only broadcast at specified times

D: they cover a broad spectrum of the radio allowing reception on almost any type of receiver 68 Which would be the subject of a NAVAREA warning? A: A drifting buoy sighted in mid-ocean

B: Extinguishment of Wolf Trap Light located inside Chesapeake Bay C: All military exercises on the high seas involving four or more vessels D: Off-air times of radio beacons when scheduled for routine maintenance

69 All VHF marine band radios operate in the simplex mode, which means that__________ A: only one person may talk at a time

B : only two persons may talk at the same time C: the radio only transmits D: the radio only receives

70 What does the abbreviation VHF stand for?_______ A: Vessel‘s Hoisting Flag B: Very High Safety

C: Vessel‘s Homing Frequency D: Very High Frequency

71 The pilot motor launches are_______blue ,with PILOT in white. A: furnished B: painted C: prepared D: written

72 Which one of the followings is not a right way to call an unknown vessel on VHF? A: According B:According to her cargo C:According to her movements D:According to her crewmembers

73 A bollard is found on the___

A:BEACH B:deck C；Pier D:towed vessel

74 A mooring line leading at nearly right angles to yhe keel is a____ A: Spring line B: bow line C: stern line D;breast line 75A stopper is______

A : a short length of line used for temporarily holding another line B: a snatch block for handling a topping lift C: an engine order telegraph D :the brake on a cargo winch

76 In order to correctly open a new coil of manila, you should____ A: pull the tagged end from the top of the coil B : pull the tagged end through the eye of the coil C: secure the outside end and unroll the coil D : unreel the coil from a spool

77Paints and solvents on a vessel should be_______ A: stored safely at the work site until work is completed B: returned to the paint locker after each use

C: covered at all times to protect from ignition sources D:stored in a suitable gear locker 78A distress signal_____________

A: consists of 5 or more short blasts of the signal apparatus B: consists of the raising and lowering of a large white flag C: may be used separately or with other distress signals D: is used to indicate doubt another vessel‘s intentions

79 The commander of a rescue unit designated to co-ordinate search and rescue operations within a specified area is the_____

A:General commander B: Commander general C:Search commander D:On-scene commander

80 CLEARLY MARKED WAY IN THE VESSEL WHICH HAS TO BE FOLLOWED IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY defines________ A. Escape route B.Alley way C.Corridor D.Embarking way

81.You are on watch at night in port and discover a fire in 1 hatch. Which action should you take FIRST ?______

A. Advise the Chief Mate and Master. B. Release carbon dioxide into the hatch. C. Sound the general alarm. D. Lead a fire hose to the hatch.

82. What kind of fixed extinguishing plant is installed in an oil tankers engine room and pump room?

A. Powder plant B. Foam plant C. CO2 plant

D. Water spray plant

83. Knowing the compass heading that is 90°to the side of a ship will enable the operator of a survival craft to initially steer ______. A. into the wind

B. away in fire and smoke

C. directly to the standby boat D. directly to the nearest land

84.When launching a lifeboat,frapping lines should be rigged _____ A.before the gripes are released B.before the boat is moved from the davits C.at the embarkation deck D.after the boat is in the water

85. _____ is the most visible signal of distress from a lifeboat at sea in the daytime． A. Smoke signal B. Flash signal C. Fire signal

D. Radio emergency transmission

86. It is generally NOT allowed to clean up an oil spill by using ______. A. a boom

B. suction equipment C. chemical agents D. skimmers

87. First aid means ______.

A. medical treatment of accident B. setting of broken bones

C. emergency treatment at the scene of the injury D. dosage of medications

88. In which way may intake of poisoning material not occur? A. By inhaling

B. By skin penetrating and skin absorbing C. By swallowing

D. By protective measures

(一)

Passage 3-30

东北至西南8海里TSS

NEW AND AMENDED TRAFFIC SEPARATION SCHEME SOFF TUSKAR ROCK (amended scheme)

Reference chart: British Admiralty 1787，2004 edition.

Description of the traffic separation scheme:(a) A separation zone，two miles wide，is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 52°14'.0 N，6°00'.8 W (2) 52°08'.5 N，6°03'.8 W (3) 52°04'.7 N，6°11'.5 W

(b) A traffic lane，three miles wide，is established on each side of the separation zone.

Inshore traffic zone：The area bounded between the landward boundary of the traffic separation

scheme and lines connecting Tuskar Rock Lighthouse (52°12'.2N，6°12'.4W) and the following geographical positions is designated an inshore traffic zone:

(4) 52°15'.2 N，6°57'.0 W (northerly corner of the scheme) (5) 52°07'.8 N，6°15'.6 W (westerly corner of the scheme)

[]The distance between the seaward boundary【分界线】 and landward boundary the traffic separation scheme is ________ miles. A. 2 B. 3 C. 5 D. 8 #D这个距离在海界和陆界之间，分道通航制是8海里

[90]The traffic separation scheme consists of ________ traffic lanes. A. 2 B. 3 C. 4 D. 5

#A这个分道通航制包括2个交通道

[91] Tuskar Rock Lighthouse is located nearby the ________. A. westerly corner of the scheme B. northerly corner of the scheme C. middle of the scheme D. outside of the scheme #C Tuskar Rock灯塔是至于分道中间

[92]The traffic separation scheme is probably leading in ________ direction. A. NW-SE B. N-S C. E-W D. NE-SW #D这个分道通航制是大概引入是东北到南西方位

(二)

Passage 3-8

雷达增益

By turning the GAIN control clockwise，the gain of the receiver increases and the observing range of the target expands. Adjust this control so that the best pictures may be displayed on the screen，according to the range scale in use. In the short range，it is advisable to operate the equipment with this control set at a setting where the receiver gain is rather lowered a little. In the long range，it is advisable to operate the equipment with this control set at a setting where the receiver gain is rather increased a little. With too little gain，the small targets are missed and there is a decrease in the detected range. With excessive gain，since the screen becomes brighter because the noise increases，the contrast between echoes and background noise reduces，making target observation more difficult. In the crowded regions，the gain may be reduced to clear the picture. [29]Switching from short range to long range，you will have to _______. 从小范围转换到大范围，你应该转动增益顺时针。 A. turn the Gain control clockwise B. turn the Gain control anticlockwise C. turn off the Gain

D. keep the Gain control remaining in its original position #A

[30]By turning the Gain clockwise，the contrast between echoes and background noise will _______. 对于顺时针转动增益，回波和背景噪音之间的对比将会减小。 A. increase B. decrease C. not change

D. increase or decrease according to the range scale in use

#B

[31]By _______ the best picture will be displayed on the screen，.

对于增加或者减少增益，按照距离标尺的使用，最好的图像将会显示在屏幕上。 A. turning the Gain control clockwise B. turning the Gain control anticlockwise

C. keeping the Gain control remaining in its original position

D. increasing or decreasing the gain according to the range scale in use #D

[32]With too little gain，_______.

太小的增益，则小目标会丢失，同时减少察觉范围圈。

A. the target observation will be more difficult under the increasing contrast B. the contrast between echoes and background noise reduces C. the screen becomes brighter because the noise increases

D. the small targets are missed and there is a decrease in the detected range #D

题号--答案 1--A 6--C 11--A 16--B 21--C 26--C 31--A 36--B 41--B 46--D 51--C 56--C 61--A 66--D 71--B 76--B 81--C 86--C 题号--答案 2--A 7--B 12--B 17--D 22--B 27--B 32--D 37--B 42--C 47--B 52--A 57--C 62--B 67--A 72--D 77--B 82--C 87--C 题号--答案 3--B 8--D 13--B 18--C 23--C 28--C 33--D 38--A 43--A 48--B 53--D 58--A 63--B 68--D 73--C 78--C 83--B 88--D 题号--答案 4--B 9--A 14--C 19--C 24--B 29--D 34--B 39--A 44--A 49--B 54-- B 59--B --C 69--A 74--D 79--D 84--C --DACD 题号--答案 5--B 10--A 15--C 20--B 25--A 30--D 35--B 40--B 45--A 50--A 55--C 60--A 65--C 70--D 75--A 80--A 85--A 90--ABDD 50期 903英语机考题目汇编 1, Some of these shoals have been disproved and are not charted．Nevertheless mariners should ______ with particular caution in this area．

A. go B. proceed C. move D. remove

2,Information on the operating times and characteristics of foreign radiobeacons can be found in which publication?

A. List of Lights B. Coast Pilot C. Sailing Directions D. List of Radiobeacons

3.A red triangular daymark marks ______.

A. the centerline of a navigable channel B. the starboard side of a channel C. a prominent object of navigational interest that has no lateral significance D. an area of a channel where passing another vessel is permitted KEY: B

4.What information is found in the chart title?

A. Date of the first edition B. Date of the edition and，if applicable，the revision C. Information on the sounding datum

D. Information on which IALA buoyage system applies

5.The maximum difference between mean time and apparent time is ______.

A. equal to the longitude expressed in time units B. about 16 minutes

C. the difference between the GHA of mean sun and the first point of Aries D. 15°of arc

6.The chart of a beach area shows a very flat slope to the underwater

beach bottom. What type of breakers can be expected when trying to land a boat on this beach?

A. Surging B. Spilling C. Plunging D. Converging

7,the broken magenta lines starting at Mountank point and running generally ENE to Bloci Island indicate ________

A recommended tracks to Block Island B a submerged cable area C a military exercise area

D demarcation lines for application of the COLREGS

8 navigate with ____ small fishing boats are within 0.8miles of me

A carefulil B skill C concern D caution

9.Mariners are FIRST warned of serious defects or important changes to aids to navigation by means of ______.

A. marine broadcast Notice to Mariners B. Weekly Notices to Mariners C. corrected editions of charts D. Light Lists

10.All events relating to the voyage，such as ship's position，speed and details of the weather，are recorded in ______. A. Logbook B. Bell Book

C. Oil Record Book D. Compass Error Book

11.Prior to burning or welding on a fuel tank on a ship, regulations require that an inspection be made. An entry in the unofficial logbook is required if this inspection is made by ______. A. a marine chemist

B. the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection C. the Master or person in charge of the ship D. the National Fire Protection Association 12I have ______ damage below water line. A. large B. big C. important D. major

13_____ the torn bags of castor seeds you mentioned we have already replaced them by new ones. A regard B regards C regarded D regarding

14who checks the bridge clokc for accuracy each day? A third officer B second officer C chief officer D assistant officer

15 Which signal of the follwings is not provided with onboard lifeboat? A.Rocket parachute signals B.Buoyant smoke signals C.Hand flare signals D.Self-igniting signals

16.A qualified deck officer should be ______ the watch． A. in charge of B. arranged C. decided to D. the depth of

17. Emergency compressed air breathing escape sets onboard, shall have a duration of service no less than _____. A. 20 minutes B. 15 minutes C. 10 minutes D. 5 minutes

18 According to SOLAS the breathing air apparatus that must be onboard shall have sufficient capacity for how many minutes of operation? A. 20 B. 30 C. 45 D. 60

19 Where should you record the crude oil washing after completion? A. Oil Record Book B. Cow manual C. Pumping Log D. Inter plant manual

20 83. Shipboard Emergency Drills must be carried out at least_____? A. Once every third year B. Once a month C. Once a year D. Once a week

21,In anchoring orders , UP AND DOWN means____ A the chain is not upright B the chain is tight C the chain is upright D the chain is slack

22 it is all right to rig the pilot ladder on lee side_____ A to allow port Authorities to board B allowing port Authorities to board C to allow port Authorities boarding

D allowing port Authorities to be boarded 23．A spring line is ______.

A. any wire rope used for mooring B. a fire-warp

C. a mooring line running diagonally to the keel D. a mooring line perpendicular to the keel

24．Vessel towing with the current shall ____ tow more than two boats and they must be towed alongside. A. at times B. at any time C. at no time D. at moment 25.Your ship is steaming at night with the gyropilot engaged. You notice that the vessel‘s course is slowly changing to the right. Which action should you take FIRST?______.

A. Notify the engine room of the steering malfunction. B. Change to hand steering. C. Call the Master D. Send the Quartermaster to the emergency steering station.

26.when you are steering on a pair of range lights and find the upper light is in line above the lower light ,you should _____

A continue on the present course B come left C come right

D wait until the lights are no longer in a vertical line

27.Which vessel is underway according to the Rules?______

A. A vessel made fast to a single point mooring buoy B. A purse seiner hauling her nets C. A pilot vessel at anchor D. A vessel which has run aground 28A vessel is in sight of another vessel when ______. A. she can be observed by radar

B. she can be observed visually from the other vessel

C. she can be plotted on radar well enough to determine her heading D. her fog signal can be heard

29 Every vessel shall at all times maintain a proper lookout ______. A. By sight.

B. By sight and hearing.

C. By sight and hearing as well as by all available means appropriate to the prevailing circumstances. D. By sight and hearing as well as by all available means except smelling.

30.When is a stand-on vessel FIRST allowed by the Rules to take action in order to avoid collision? A. When the two vessels are less than half a mile from each other.

B. When the give-way vessel is not taking appropriate action to avoid collision.

C. When collision is imminent. D. The stand-on vessel is never allowed to take action. 31.A light signal consisting of three flashes means ______. A. I am in doubt as to your actions B. My engines are full speed astern C. I desire to overtake you

D. I am operating astern propulsion

32______ means the curve on the earth's surface which cuts all the meridians at the same angle． A. Great Circle B. Position Line C. Rhumb line D. True Bearing

33.Which word indicates color variation in the characteristics of a light? A. Opposing B. Changing C. Reversing D. Alternating

34.A SEAMARK，I.E. A BUOY，INDICATING THE NORTH，EAST，SOUTH OR WEST FROM A FIXED POINT，E.G. A WRECK is ______. A. Entrance buoy B. New buoy C. Port buoy D. Cardinal buoy

35.Mean high water is the average height of ______

A. the higher high waters B. the lower high waters C. the lower of the two daily tides D. all high waters 36.The meaning of ebb tide is that ______. A. tide is falling from high water to low water B. tide is rising from low water to high water C. tide is reaching to a highest level D. tide is reaching to a lowest level

37.After transferring a weight forward on a vessel，the draft at the center of flotation will ______.

A. change，depending on the location of the LCG B. increase C. decrease

D. remain constant

38.If the buoyant force on a ship's hull is equal to the displacement tonnage，the ship will ______. A. require ballast

B. be down by the head C. sink D. float

39.Reducing the liquid free surfaces in a vessel reduces the ______. A. roll period

B. metacentric height C. waterplane area D. vessel's draft

40 2116 How should you signal the crane operator to raise the boom?

A. Extend arm with the thumb pointing up and flex the fingers in and out. B. Place both fists in front of the body with the thumbs pointing upward.

C. With forearm vertical and forefinger pointing up, move hand in small horizontal circles. D. Extend arm with fingers closed and point thumb upward. 41 Where is the draft largest when the ship has an aft trim? A.Forward B.Aft

C.Midships

D.The drafts are equal all over the ship

42 Filler cargo refers to ______. A. durable packages B. small pieces

C. the cargo in which the voids appear

D. the cargo suitable for stowage in void spaces

43.Strong smelling cargo should be stowed ______ the cargo absorbing foreign smell． A. together with B. on top of C. underneath D. away from

44.The damaged cargo is not allowed to export without ______. A. repairing or replacing B. to repair or to replace C. being repaired or replaced D. to be repaired or replaced

45.The Agent promised to keep me ______ of how our business was going on． A. to be informed B. informed C. on informing D. informing

46.1993 The man directing and supervising the work of stevedores is the ______. A. Local agent. B. Watchman. C. Docker. D. Foreman.

471267 The tropical cyclone eastly 10 knots and expected ______ from 120000 GMT. A. Falling down. B. Fixing up. C. Filling up. D. down.

Dropping

48.TYPHOON FORECAST MOVE 285 DEG 15 KNOT FIRST 12 HOURS THEN 280 DEG 17 KNOTS NEXT 12 HOURS. The movement of the Typhoon is in ______ quadrant. A. NE B. SE C. NW D. SW 49.Swell is the rise and fall of the ocean's surface due to ______. A. fetch

B. distant winds C. local storms

D. the pull of the moon

50.Fog is most commonly associated with a(n) ______. A. warm front at night B. low pressure area C. anticyclone

D. lack of frontal activity

51.In most cases，the direction of the apparent wind lies between the bow and ______.

A. the direction of the true wind B. true north

C. the beam on the windward side D. the beam on the lee side

52[3479]The inner bottom is the ______. A. tank top

B. compartment between the tank top and shell of the vessel C. inner side of the vessel's shell

D. space between two transverse bottom frames

53______ is halfway between the forward and after perpendiculars and is reference point for vessel construction A half length B mid_body C center line D amidships

54.Watertight compartments are separated by _____. A. Longitudinal bulkhead B. Tween decks C. Dunnages

D. Decks and bulkheads

55.The material used extensively as electrolytic protection around bronze propellers is ______. A. Brass B. Copper C. Lead D. Zinc

56.Before starting any diesel or gasoline engine，which of the following must be checked?

A. Oil level

B. Flow of cooling water C. Exhaust discharge D. All of the above

57.The holding capability of an anchor is primarily determined by the ______.

A. shape of the anchor

B. stowage of the anchor on board C. anchor's ability to dig in

D. size of the vessel and its draft 58. A Racon can help with __?

A.measuring the distance B.measuring the relative C.identifying centimeters D.identifying a seamark

59. The radio waves used for radar are very short，only ______ long． A. a few centimeters B. a few fathoms C. a few meters D. a few feet

60. 103. What type of radar can activate a racon? A. X-band radar B. S-band radar C. C-band radar D. No radar can

61. Magnetic variation changes with a change in ______. A. the vessel's heading B. sea conditions C. seasons

D. the vessel's position

62. Deviation is the angle between the ______. A. true meridian and the axis of the compass card B. true meridian and the magnetic meridian

C. magnetic meridian and the axis of the compass card D. axis of the compass card and the degaussing meridian

63. Which one of the followings is incorrect about magnetic compass? A.The magentic compass is compulsory on my vessel B.The magentic compass is prone to error

C.The magentic compass is always placed inside steel constructions

D.The magentic compass needs to be calibrated to compensate for local magnetic distortion

. With respect to automatic identification systems(AIS) which of the following information is broadcast every one to ten seconds?

A.Vessel‘s draft B.Air Draft C.Navigational status D.Dimensions of vessel 65. In case of AIS overload, what can you expect? A. AIS will shut down

B. AIS will ―freeze‖

C. Largest far away drop out D. Closes targets drop out

66. What may affect the accuracy of sounding with echo sounder? A.Sea bottom B.Ship's speed C.Speed of current

D.Water temperature and density

67. Which piece of required GMDSS equipment is the primary source of transmitting locating signals?

A. Radio Direction Finder B. An EPIRB transmitting on 406 MHz C. Survival Craft Transceiver D. A SART transmitting on 406 MHz 68. How can the SART‘s audible tone monitor be used?______. A. It informs survivors that assistance may be nearby.

B. It informs survivors when the battery‘s charge condition has weakened. C. It informs survivors when the SART switches to the standby mode. D. It informs survivors that a nearby vessel is signaling on DSC. 69. The pilot {embarked} the ship at 1830 hours． A. boarded B. left C. piloted D. loaded

70. There is a drifting mine ______ in position 21 degrees 31 minutes

North 124 degrees 20 minutes East． A. report B. reports C. reported D. reporting

71. Please tell me ______ to reverse your engine from full ahead to full astern. A. how length will it take B. how long it will take

C. how long will it get D. how much hours it will take

72. What is the meaning of the word ―ROGER‖ when used in radio communication? A. Please repeat your message B. Not readable C. Correct

D. I have received your transmission satisfactorily

73. A bollard is found on the ______. A. beach B. deck C. pier

D. towed vessel

74. The heel block is located ______.

A. at the base of the boom B. at the cargo hook C. near the midships guy D. near the spider band

75. How is the size of chain determined?______.

A. Length of link in inches B. Diameter of metal in link in inches or centimeters C. Links per fathom D. Weight of stud cable in pounds 76. A mooring line leading 45° to the keel，used to check forward or astern movement of a vessel，is called a ______. A. spring line B. warp line C. bow line D. breast line

77. Vessel's provisions refer to ______ of the vessel． A. fuel oil

B. vegetables and food C. spare parts on board D. ballast water

78. A continuous sounding of a fog-signal apparatus indicates ______. A. the vessel is in distress

B. the vessel has completed loading dangerous cargo C. it is safe to pass

D. the vessel is anchored

79. Instructions on how to conduct search and rescue are given in the ______ which is primarily designed for use by merchant ship. A. MARPOL---Marine Pollution

B. IRPCS---International Regulations for Prevention of Collisions at Sea C. SOLAS---Safety Of Life At Sea

D. MERSAR---Merchant Ships Search And Rescue

80. After using a CO2 portable extinguisher, it should be ______

A. put back in service if some CO2 remains B. hydrostatically tested C. retagged D. recharged

81. [5803]A ROUND THROUGH THE VESSEL CARRIED OUT BY A CREW MEMBER OF THE WATCH

AT CERTAIN INTERVALS SO THAT AN OUTBREAK OF FIRE MAY BE PROMPTLY DETECTED defines ______. A. Fire patrol B. Fire control C. Smoke detection D. Fire drill

82. What is the meaning of UEL? A. Upper exposure level

B. Upper explosion level C. Upper explosive level D. Upper evaporation level

83. Puncture leaks in the lower tubes or bottom of an inflatable liferaft should FIRST be stopped by using ______. A. sealing clamps B. repair tape C. a tube patch

D. sail twine and vulcanizing kit

84.If help has not arrived in 10-12 hours after you abandon a vessel in a survival craft，you should ______.

A. go in one direction until the fuel runs out B. plot a course for the nearest land

C. take a vote on which direction you should go D. shut down the engine(s) and set the sea anchor

85. What type of oil is most suitable for reducing the effect of heavy seas? A. Crude oil B. Fuel oil

C. Vegetable oil D. Lubricating oil

86When the ship causes oil pollution to the port,she will be______ A、find B、levied C、paid D、deducted

[87]In all but the most severe cases，bleeding from a wound should be controlled by ______.

A. applying direct pressure to the wound B. submerging the wound in lukewarm water C. cooling the wound with ice D. applying a tourniquet

[88]A crew member suffering from hypothermia should be given ______. A. a small dose of alcohol B. treatment for shock C. a large meal

D. a brisk rub down

一

BISCAY：SW 3 OR 4 INCREASING 6 TO GALE 8，THEN VEERING NW 5．RAIN THEN SHOWERS．MODERATE OR POOR BECOMING GOOD．FINISTERRE： WESTERLY 6，LOCALLY GALE 8，VEERING NW 5．RAIN THEN SHOWERS．MODERATE OR POOR BECOMING GOOD．EAST NORTHERN SECTION：W OR SW 6 TO GALE 8，BUT IN NORTH-EAST CYCLONIC 4 AT FIRST，AND IN NORTH-WEST SOUTHERLY 6 TO GALE 8 AT FIRST．WINTRY SHOWERS．MAINLY GOOD．WEST NORTHERN SECTION：IN NORTH，CYCLONIC 6 TO GALE 8，LOCALLY SEVERE GALE 9，BECOMING VARIABLE 3 OR 4．WINTRY SHOWERS．MAINLY GOOD．MODERATE ICING IN WEST AT FIRST WITH TEMPERATURE -2℃ TO -5℃．IN SOUTH WESTERLY 6 TO GALE 8，LOCALLY SEVERE GALE 9，BACKING SOUTHERLY AND INCREASING LOCALLY STORM 10

LATER．WINTRY SHOWERS THEN SNOW．MAINLY GOOD BECOMING MODERATE． [].Backing means the wind ____B___． A．is changing clockwise in direction B．is changing anticlockwise in direction

C．is changing cyclonically or variably in direction D．remains unchanged in direction at the time

[90].The visibility in EAST NORTHERN section is mainly ___C____． A．poor B．moderate C．GOOD D．very GOOD

[91].In north part of WEST NORTHERN section，the wind is ____A___． A．cyclonic 6 to gale 8 at first B．cyclonic 4 at first C．westly 6 to gale 8 D．variable 3 or 4 at first [92].This passage is likely to be under the heading of ____A____． A．FORECAST B．GALE WARNING C．SYNOPSIS D．STORM WARNING

二

The Chief Officer，or First Mate as he is often called，is the Master's chief officer and head of the Deck Department．He is assisted by a Second Officer（Mate），a Third Officer（Mate），and sometimes a Fourth Officer（Mate）．Several companies employ a First Officer as well as a Chief Officer．The Deck Department also includes a Boatswain（Bosun）and a Carpenter，both petty officers，and a number of ratings．These made up of Able Seamen（AB），Ordinary Seamen（OS）and a middle grade known as Efficient Deck Hands（EDH）．There are other grades of seamen．On some ships Navigating Cadets are carried for training purposes．

The Chief Engineer is head of the Engine Department．He is assisted by a Second，Third，Fourth and sometimes Fifth Engineer．An Electrical Officer may also be carried．The engine room petty officers are the Storekeeper and Donkeyman．On tankers there is also a Pumpman．He is also a petty officer．The engine room ratings are Firemen and Greasers．There may also be Engineer Cadets． The Catering Department is under the Chief Steward．It is divided into a saloon and galley section．The former is headed by the Second Steward，the latter by the Ship's Cook．They are both usually petty officers．They are assisted by several stewards and cooks，and by a number of junior ratings．

The Radio Department often consists of only one man：the Radio Officer．On ships where continuous radio watches are kept there may be three radio officers：a Chief，Second and Third． [93].____C____ is not a petty officer．

A．Boatswain B．Second Steward C．Radio Officer D．Storekeeper [94].EDH is rank which is higher than ____C____． A．Second Steward B．AB

C．OS D．Chief Engineer [95].Storekeeper belong to _____B___．

A．Deck Dept B．Engine Dept C．Catering Dept D．Radio Dept

[96].There are _____D___ departments on bard a big ship according to the passage． A．two B．three C．four D．five

题号--答案 1--B 6--B 11--C 16--A 21--C 26--A 31--D 36--A 41--B 46--D 51--A 56--A 61--D 66--D 71--B 76--A 81--A 86--A 题号--答案 2--A 7--B 12--D 17--B 22--A 27--A 32--C 37--D 42--D 47--C 52--A 57--C 62--C 67--B 72--D 77--B 82--C 87--A 题号--答案 3--B 8--D 13--B 18--B 23--C 28--B 33--D 38--D 43--D 48--C 53--D 58--D 63--C 68--A 73--C 78--A 83--A 88--B 题号--答案 4--C 9--A 14—C 19--A 24--C 29--C 34--D 39--A 44--C 49--B 54-- D 59--A --C 69--A 74--A 79--D 84--D --BCAA 题号--答案 5--B 10--A 15--D 20--B 25--B 30--B 35--D 40--D 45--B 50--A 55--D 60--A 65--C 70--C 75--B 80--D 85--C 90--CCBD 航海英语49期机考试题汇编 1. You may find the time of slack water after low water in a certain port from _____ A.Deadweight scale B.Tide table C.Notice to mariners D.Table of azimuth

2. Many of the lights on this coast are placede so high as to be so frequently obscured by ________ A.Power B.Tower C.Cover D.Shower

3. A line of position from a celestial obsertion is a segment of a ______

A.circle of equal altitude B.parallel of declination C.parallel of altitude D.vertical of circle 4. How long would 15 minutes of longitude be at a latitude of 60 degrees North?______ A.30nm B,60nm C.15nm D.7.5nm

5.The maximum difference between mean time and apparent time is ________ A. equal to the longitude expressed in time units B. about 16 minutes

C. the difference between the GHA of mean sun and the first point of Aries D. 15°of arc 6. The chart of a beach area shows a very flat slope to the underwater

beach bottom. What type of breakers can be expected when trying to land a boat on this beach?

A. Surging B. Spilling C. Plunging D. Converging

7. Which is a weekly publication advising mariners of important matters

affecting navigational safety?

A. Light List B. Notice to Mariners C. Coast Pilot D. Sailing Directions 8.Navigate with ___.Small fishing boats are within 0.8 mile of me. A.crefull B.skill C. concern D.caution

9. The Admiralty Notices to Mariners can be obtained _____ by Masters of

vessels from any Admiralty Chart Agent．

A. free of charge B. with no responsibility C. without limitations of distribution D. with little charges

10. The proper way to correct a mistake in the logbook is to ____. A. erase the entry and rewrite

B. draw several lines through the entry，rewrite，and initial the correction C. completely black out the entry，rewrite，and initial the correction D. draw one line through the entry，rewrite，and initial the correction 11. When a vessel is entering or leaving a port，a record of engine speeds is kept in the _____.

A. bell book B. deck rough log C. Official Logbook D. engine rough log

12. I‘d like to know the full _____ of the accident．

A. particular B. particulars C. in particular D. in particulars 13. The extent of the damage could not be _____ though I inspected it with the Chief Stevedore in charge.

A. sure B. contained C. ascertained D. applied 14. For whom is the ISM Code mandatory?

A. All vessels 500 GRT and above B. All tankers C. All vessels built after 1998 D. All vessels on international routes

15. That the _____ showed that the ship complied with the requirements of the said Convention.

A. looking B. seeing C. sightseeing D. inspection

16. If the officer of the watch must leave the voyage plan, he should _____?

A. Make a note in the logbook B. Inform the mater C. No special action necessary D. Check the new plan

17. The Safety of Life at Sea Convention was developed by the ______. A. IMDG conference

B. American Bureau of Shipping

C. International Maritime Organization D. American Institute of Maritime Shipping

18.The maneuvering information required to be posted in the wheelhouse must bu based on certain conditions.Which of the following is not one of these conditions?

A.The hull must bu clean B.There must be calm weather-wind 10 knots or less and a calm sea

C.There must be no current D.The depth of the water mest be at least one and one—half times the draft

19. How to determine the density of the slop after tank washing?

A. By use of an interferometer B. By use of a hydrometer C. By use of an interface D. By use of a thermometer

20. No oil or mixture containing oil _____ into Singapore waters from any

vessel．

A. shall not be discharged B. shall be discharged C. shall be filled D. shall not be filled

21.What is a CORRECT reply to a pilot‘s request,―How‘s your heading‖? A.Steady B.Eased to 10 rudder C.Checked D.Passing 50

22. The ideal rope for stoppers should satisfy the following requirements except that _____. A. The stopper should be of synthetic fibre rope

B. The size of the stopper should be as large as possible C. The stopper should be of low stretch material D. The stopper should be very flexible

23. The best method to stop a vessel from dragging anchor in a sand bottom is to _____.

A. reduce the length of the cable B. pay out more anchor cable C. back the engines D. swing the rudder several times to work the anchor into the bottom 24. _____ is prohibited in this area．

A. Anchor B. Anchoring C. Anchored D. Being anchored

25. A vessel fitted with twin screws is easier in _____ than a vessel with single screw．

A. turning maneuver B. course setting C. position fixing D. regulating speed 26. If your propeller is racing in rough weather，you should _____.

A. decrease your engine speed B. ignore it C. increase your engine speed D. stop your engine until the rough weather passes

27. Which vessel is underway according to the Rules?_____

A. A vessel made fast to a single point mooring buoy B. A purse seiner hauling her nets C. A pilot vessel at anchor D. A vessel which has run aground 28. All of the following are engaged in fishing EXCEPT _____.

A. A vessel trawling B. A vessel trolling C. A vessel setting nets D. A vessel tending lines．

29. Any alteration of course and/or speed to avoid collision shall，if the circumstances of the case admit，______ to another vessel observing visually or by radar. A. be large enough to be readily apparent B. be a succession of small alterations

C. be with due regard to the power and speed of the vessel D. leave sufficient room for the other vessel to take action

30. Two short blasts of the whistle have all of the following meanings EXCEPT ______.

A. I intend to meet you starboard to starboard． B. I do not intend to hold course and speed． C. I intend to overtake you on your port side． D. I intend to alter my course to port．

31. If your vessel is the stand-on vessel in a crossing situation __ ___. A. you must keep your course and speed

B. you may change course and speed as the other vessel must keep clear

C. the other vessel must keep her course and speed D. both vessels must keep their course and speed

32. You should plot your dead reckoning position _____.

A. from every fix or running fix B. from every estimated position C. every three minutes in pilotage waters D. only in pilotage waters

33. A buoy having red and green horizontal bands would have a light characteristic of ______. ．A. interrupted quick flashing B. composite group flashing C. Morse (A) D. quick flashing 34. In region A, The green buoys are kept to_____and red to _____when sailing from____to____. A.starboard,port,sea,land B.starboard,port,land,sea C.port,starboard,land,land D.port,starboard,sea,sea 35. Spring tides are tides that ______.

A. have lows lower than normal and highs higher than normal B. have lows higher than normal and highs lower than normal C. are unpredictable D. occur in the spring of the year

36. The movement of water away from the shore or downstream is called a(n) ______ A. reversing current B. ebb current C. flood current D. slack current 37. A vessel is listed when it is ______.

A. down by the head B. down by the stern C. inclined due to off-center weight D. inclined due to wind

38. Metacentric height is a measure of ______.

A. initial stability only B. stability through all angles C. maximum righting arm D.All of the above 39.The mean draft of a ship is the draft _______

A.Midway between the forwad and aft draft marks B.At the center of flotation C.At the loadline D.At the center of buoyancy

40. Keeping the draft at or below the load line mark will insure that the vessel has adequate ______.

A. ballast B. reserve buoyancy C. displacement D. rolling periods 41.For a floating ship, ture mean draft is always the _____

A.average of the observed drafts B.draft at the center of flotation

C.draft corresponding to the calculated displament D.mean of the calculated draft 42.We usually choose cargo—handling equipment according to _______?

A.the ship type B.the port‘s organization C.the cargo‘ nature D.the docker‘s ability 43. The necessity of the segregation of cargoes is determined by ______.

A. experience from practice B. various types of cargoes C. different types of ships D. personal abilities

44. During loading or discharging，the tallymen must make contact with_____on duty so as to solve problems in time．

A．ship owner B．ship‘s officers C．shippers D．consignors 45.We‘ll adopt the mechanical talling method _____.

A.soon or late B .soon or later C.sooner or late D.sooner or later 46.Inflammble caigo _____in the holds adjacent to the angine room.

A.shall never be stowed B.may br stowed C.can be stowed D.should be stowed

47. TYPHOON FORECAST MOVE 285 DEG 15 KNOT FIRST 12 HOURS THEN 280 DEG

17 KNOTS NEXT 12 HOURS. The movement of the Typhoon is in __C_ quadrant. A. NE B. SE C. NW D. SW

48. Hurricane warnings are issued ______ when winds of force 12 or above

are expected．

A. in all parts of the world B. in some parts of the world C. from all corners of the world D. from every corner of the world

49. Swell is the rise and fall of the ocean's surface due to ______.

A. fetch B. distant winds C. local storms D. the pull of the moon 50. Monsoons(季风)characterized by ______.

A. light，variable winds with little or no humidity

B. strong，gusty winds that blow from the same general direction all year C. steady winds that reverse direction semiannually

D. strong，cyclonic winds that change direction to conform to the passage of an extreme low pressure system

51. In most cases，the direction of the apparent wind lies between the bow and ______.

A. the direction of the true wind B. true north C. the beam on the windward side D. the beam on the lee side

52. Panting frames are located in the ______.

A. after double bottoms B. centerline tanks on tankers C. fore and after peaks D. forward double bottoms

53. The collision bulkhead shall be of _A____.

A. water-tight B. air-tight C. fire-tight D. oil-tight 54. Which is the winter load waterline on the load waterline mark?_____

A. The line over the summer load waterline B. The line above the tropical load waterline C. The line below the tropical load waterline

D. The line between the summer and the winter North Atlantic load waterline

55. In relation to cargo gear，what does SWL mean? ______.

A. Safe working load B. Ship's working lift C. Starboard wing lift D. Stress，weight，load 56. A chain stripper is used to _____.

A. prevent chain from clinging to the wildcat B. clean the marine debris from the chain

C. flake chain from a boat‘s chain locker D. clean chain prior to an x-ray inspection

57. The primary reason for placing covers over storage batteries is to _____. A. prevent the accumulation of explosive gases B. protect the hull from leaking electrolyte

C. prevent movement of the battery in rough waters D. protect against accidental shorting across terminal

58、A Rcon can help with _____?A..measuring the distance B. measuring the relative speed C.identifying a vessel D.identifying a seamark

59______is on the panel of radar. A.KEYLOCK B.REPEATER C.STATIC INVERTER D.ANT-CLUTTER-SEA

60. In order to insure that a RACON signal is displayed on the radar, you should ______.

A. increase the brilliance of the PPI scope B. turn off the interference controls on the radar

C. use the maximum available range setting D. increase the radar signal output 61. Deviation changes with a change in _____

A.vessel‘s geographic position B. vessel‘s heading C. vessel‘s magnetic field D.influence of the magnetic materials of the vessel

62. Deviation changes with a change in ______. A. latitude B. heading C. longitude D. sea conditions

63. ______ the repeater compass with the master compass，please． A. Similize B. Clock

C. Synchronize D. Position

. With respect to automatic identification systems(AIS)which of the fowllowing information is broadcast every one to ten seconds?

A.Vessel‘s draft B.Air Draft C.Navigational status D.Dimensions of vessel 65. Automatic identification systems (AIS) are expected to broadcast all of the following information EXCEPT ______. A. Port of origin B. Name of vessel

C. Course and speed over ground D. Draft of vessel

66. All echo-sounders can measure the ______. A. actual depth of water

B. actual depth of water below keel

C. average depth from waterline to hard bottom D. average depth of water to soft bottom

67. The maritime radio system consisting of a series of coast stations transmitting coastal warning is called ______.

A. NAVTEK B. HYDROLANT/HYDROPAC C. NAVAREA D. SAFESEA 68. What would most likely prevent a SART's signal from being detected? A. Signal absorption by the ionosphere B. Heavy sea swells

C. The rescue personnel were monitoring the 10-cm radar D. The rescue personnel were monitoring the 3-cm radar

69. International distress signal in VHF calling for help is _____.

A. Help,Help,Help B. Maday,Maday,Maday C. Save,Save,Save D.Rescue,Rescue,Rescue 70. What is the MOST important thing you should do before transmitting on a marine radio?

A. Ask for permission.

B. Record the time in your radio log.

C. Press the push to talk button three times. D. Monitor the channel to insure that it is clear.

71. There is a drifting mine ______ in position 21 degrees 31 minutes

North 124 degrees 20 minutes East． A. report B. reports C. reported D. reporting

72. Get the searchlight ______ for transiting the canal at night. A. turned off B. already C. almost D. ready

73. 120. Cleaning, painting and repairing work is known as _____. A. Maintenance work B. Lashing work C. Tallying work D. Overtime work

74. An example of a messenger is a ______. A. fairlead B. heaving line C. stay D. warp

75.Which type of line would have LEAST resistance to mildew and rot? A.Manila B.Nylon C.Dacron D.Polypropylene

76.A mooring line that checks forward motion of a vessel at a pier is a ______. A. bow line

B. forward bow line C. stern line

D. stern breast line

77What are the three bastic types of starters?A.Air,water,electric B. Air,hydraulic.electric C.Metered, hydraulic ,automatic D. Air,emergency, hydraulic

78 If you saw flames aboard a vessel but could see the vessel was not on fire，you would know that the ______. A. crew was trying to get warm

B. vessel required immediate assistance

C. vessel was attempting to attract the attention of a pilot boat D. vessel was being illuminated for identification by aircraft 79. When is the parallel sweep search used? A. When searching a small area B. When searching a large area

C. When searching over hilly terrain D. When searching during night

80. Portable fire extinguishers must be provided for the cargo tank area

of an unmanned tank barge ______. A. only when fully loaded

B. if one or more tanks are full C. when transferring cargo

D. only when the barge is being towed

81. You are on watch at sea at night and a fire breaks out in 3 hold. What should be done IMMEDIATELY?

A. Shut down the cargo hold ventilation. B. Proceed to the space and determine the extent of the fire. C. Flood the space with CO2 from the fixed fire fighting system. D. Cool the deck to contain the fire 82. What is the meaning of UEL? A. Upper exposure level B. Upper explosion level C. Upper explosive level D. Upper evaporation level 83. A sea anchor is ______. A. a heavy anchor with an extra long line used to anchor in deep water B. a cone shaped bag used to slow down the wind drift effect C. a pad eye to which the sea painter is made fast D. made of wood if it is of an approved type

84. The line-throwing appliance provided on board ship is ______. A. for the saving of life B. for fire-fighting

C. for mooring purpose D. for towing purpose

85.In the first 24 hours after abondoning a vessel, water should be given only to personnel who are ______.

A. thirsty B. sick or injured C. wet D. awake 86. What does OBO mean? A. Oil Bulk Oil B. Ore Bulk Oil C. Only Bulk Ore D. Only Basic Oil

87.When chipping rust on a vessel,the MOST important piece of safety gear is____.

A.a hard hat B、gloves C、goggles D、a long sleeve shirt 88、You should FIRST treat a simple fracture by

A、attempting to set the fracture B、preventing her movement of the bone C、applying a tourniquet D、alternately applying hot and cold compresses （一）

EGC Message ---- MET Navarea Warning or MET Forecast ---Message Sequence No：00l03LES： KDDIPriority：UrgentSize：969charactersReceive Date 1 Time：07-09-18 06：56 (UTC)PAN PANTHIS TROFICAL CYCLONE WARING IS ISSUED FOR THE NORTH OF EQUATOR OF

METAREA XI (FOR) WARNING 180600WARFING VALID 190600WARNING IS UPDATED

EVERY 6 HOURSTYPHOON WARNINGTYPHOON 0712 WIPHA (0712） 930 HPAAT 25.7N 122.6E NORTHWEST OF ISHIGAKIJIMA MOVING NORTHWEST 16 KNOTSPOSITION GOODMAX WINDS 100 KNOTS NEAR CENTERRADIUS OF OVER 50 KNOT WINDS 90 MILESRADIUS OF OVER 30 KNOT WINDS 260 MILES NORTHEAST SEMICIRCLE AND 180 MILES ELSEWHEREFORCAST POSITION FOR 181800UTC AT 27,2N 120.8E WITH 60 MILES READIUS OF 70 PERCENT PROBABILITY CIRCLE950 HPA,MAX WINDS 85 KNOTS NEAR CENTERFORCAST POSITION FOT 190600UTC AT 29.7N 119.6E WITH 90 MILES READIUS OF 70 PERCENT PROBABILITY CIRCLE985 HPA,MAX WINDS 50 KNOTSEXTENDED OUTLOOKFORCAST POSITION FOR 200600UTC AT 37.ON 121.9E EITH 170 MILES READIUS OF 70 PENCENT PROBABILITY CIRCLE1000 HPA,MAX WINDS 35 KNOTBECOMING XTEROPICAL LOWJAPAN METEROLOGICAL AGENCY 、 Where is the message sent for?

A、Japan B、 Singapore C、 Taiwan D、New Zealand 90、What os the priority of the message?

A、Routine B、Securite C、Urgency D、Distress

91、The warning was issued at 180600 and will be first updated at A、190600 B、181256 C、180656 D、181200

92、Which of the following statements is true according to the warning?

A、950 HPA located at 25.7N 122.6E,its maximum winds near centre reach 85 knots,and radius of over 30 knot winds 260 miles northeast semicircle

B、930 HPA located at 25.7N 122.6E,its maximum winds near centre reach 100 knots, and radius of over 30 knot winds 260 miles northeast semicircle

C、 950 HPA located at 29.7N 119.6E,its maximum winds near centre reach 85 knots,and radius of over 30 knot winds 260 miles northeast semicircle

D、930 HPA located at 29.7N 119.6E,its maximum winds near centre reach 100 knots, and radius of over 30 knot winds 260 miles northeast semicircle

二

Passage 3-5

短距离通信

Communications over relatively short distances can be made by visual or sound signals. Visual signals can be sent by using flags or an Aldis lamp. An Aldis lamp is an electric lamp used for flashing messages in Morse code. The traditional method of signaling from one ship to another is by using flags. There are different colored flags for each letter of the alphabet. There are also pennant-shaped flags for numbers，and a long pennant，known as an answering or code pennant. Three other flags，which are burgee-shaped，are known as substitutes. These show that the flat or pennant is being repeated. Besides standing for a letter of the alphabet，each flag，when hoisted along，has another meaning. For example，the \"W\" flag also means: \"I require medical assistance\". Flags can also be hoisted in combinations of two，three or four. Siren，whistle，bell or other sound signals can be used in fog and similar circumstances when visual signals can not be seen.

[17]Communications over relatively short distances may be made by ________. 通信相关的距离相当短，可以不是视觉就是声号。 A. visual signals B. sound signals C. Morse Code

D. Either visual or sound signals #D

[18]An Aldis lamp is used for ________.

一个手提闪光信号的被用在莫尔斯密码发送上。 A. transmitting Morse code B. flashing flags

C. sending flag signals D. sending sound signals #A

[19]Burgee-shaped flags are used as substitutes to show ________.

燕尾旗是用来代替显示 重复的 A. \"repeating\" B. \"answering\" C. \"code\" pennant

D. \"I requiring medical assistance\" #A

[20]________ are used in fog and similar circumstances when visual signals can not be seen. 这个船的汽笛，口哨或者钟是用在雾和类似环境当视觉不能看到时候。 A. Visual signals B. Substitutes

C. Pennant-shaped flags

D. The ship's siren，whistle or bell #D

题号--答案 1-- B 6--B 11--A 16--B 21-? 26--A 31--A 36--B 41--B 46--A 51--A 56--A 61--B 66--B

71--C 76--C 81--A 86--B 72--D 77--B 82--C 87--A 73--A 78--B 83--B 88--B 74--B 79--B 84--A --ACDB 75--A 80--C 85--B 90--DAAD 题号--答案 2--D 7--B 12-- B 17--C 22--B 27--B 32--A 37--C 42--C 47--C 52--C 57--D 62--B 67--A 题号--答案 3--A 8--D 13--C 18--D 23--B 28--B 33--B 38--A 43--B 48- B 53--A 58--D 63--B 68--C 题号--答案 4--D 9--A 14--A 19--B 24--B 29--A 34--A 39--A 44--B 49--? 54--D 59--D --C 69--B 题号--答案 5--B 10--D 15--D 20--B 25--A 30--B 35--A 40--B 45--D 50--C 55--A 60--B 65--A 70--D 中华人民共和国海事局

2009年第5期海船船员适任统考试题（总第48期）

科目：航海英语 试卷代号：903

适用对象：无限航区、近洋航区船舶二、三副

(本试卷卷面总分100分，及格分为70分，考试时间100分钟)

答题说明：请选择一个最合适的答案，并将该答案按答题卡要求，在相应位置上用2B铅笔

涂黑。第1题至88题，每题1分，第题至96题，每题1．5分。

一、单项选择题

1. You may find the time of slack water after low water in a certain port from ________ .

A. Deadweight Scale B. Tide Tables C. Notices to Mariners D. Table of Azimuth 2. Information on the operating times and characteristics of foreign radiobeacons can be found in which publication?

A. List of Lights B. Coast Pilot C. Sailing Directions D. List of Radiobeacons

3. A line of position from a celestial observation is a segment of a ______.

A. circle of equal altitude B. parallel of declination C. parallel of altitude D. vertical circle 4. What defines a great circle?

A. A curved line drawn on a Mercator Chart

B. A course line that inscribes a loxodromic curve

C. The shortest distance between any two points on the earth D. The smallest circle that can be drawn on the face of a sphere 5. Which aid is NOT marked on a chart with a magenta circle?

A. Aero light B. Radar station C. Radar transponder beacon D. Radiobeacon 6. Charted depth is the ______.

A. vertical distance from the chart sounding datum to the ocean bottom，plus the height of tide B. vertical distance from the chart sounding datum to the ocean bottom C. average height of water over a specified period of time D. average height of all low waters at a place

7. The changes in the channel's sounds and buoys on this coast are ______ this chart can not be considered as a safe guide of the channel．

A. frequent B. so frequent

C. frequent that

D. so frequent that

8. While steaming slowly in the harbor，no ship is ________ to exceed the speed limited． A. assumed B. appreciated C. promised D. permitted

9. The mariner must be the final judge of the reliance he can place on the information given in the Admiralty charts and other publications，since they ______ .

A. may always be complete and up-to-date B. may not always be complete and up-to-date C. may sometimes be complete and up-to-date D. may not sometimes be complete and up-to-date

10. All events relating to the voyage，such as ship's position，speed and details of the weather，are

recorded in ______.

A. Logbook Book

B. Bell Book C. Oil Record Book D. Compass Error

11. When there is not a chief officer on board， ________ should keep and write up the ship's logbook．

A. the assistant officer B. the captain C. the officer on duty D. the third officer 12. As matter of fact，the damage to the winches was due to ______. A. insufficiency of packaging B. inherent vice of the cargo C. improper stowage D. rough handling

13. It's ______ that the cargo was damaged by your stevedores． A. bright B. distinct C. plain D. evident 14. Who is responsible for the regular security inspections of the ship?

A. The company security officer B. The classification society C. The port facility security officer D. The ship security officer 15. Which signal of the followings is not provided with onboard lifeboat?

A. Rocket parachute signals B. Buoyant smoke signals C. Hand flare signals D. Self-igniting signals 16. When steering by autopilot, how often should manual steering be checked?

A. Every day B. When time allows C. At least once a watch D. No checking is necessary 17. Who must be familiar with the Muster List and Emergency Instructions onboard?

A. The captain only B. The officers only

C. All crew members and other personnel onboard D. Passengers only

18. Radar reflectors are required for ______.

A. all fishing vessels over 39 feet in length B. sail-propelled fishing vessels

C. all fishing vessels of less than 200 GT

D. wooden hull fishing vessels with a poor radar echo

19. A vessel emitting harmful substances into the air or spilling oil into the sea is a ______.

A. Polluter B. Emitter C. Spiller D. Oiler

20. You are offloading garbage to another ship. Your records must identify that ship by name and show her ______.

A. home port B. next port-of-call C. official number D. Master 21. To EASE A LINE means to ______ .

A. cast off

B. double up so that one line does not take all the strain C. pay out line to remove most of the tension D. slack it off quickly 22. Generally speaking，the most favorable bottom for anchoring is ______.

A. very soft mud B. rocky C. a mixture of mud and clay D. loose sand

23. When the movement of engine is no longer required the pilot usually gives the order like this

______.

A. Stop engine B. Nothing to port C. Finish engines D. Finished with engines

24. Vessel towing with the current shall ______ tow more than two boats and they must be towed alongside．

A. at times

B. at any time

C. at no time

D. at moment

25. If a vessel under tow starts jumping on its tow line，the most appropriate action to alleviate the condition is to ______.

A. change course B. slow down C. heave to D. adjust tow line length

26. Horizontal fore or aft motion of a vessel is known as ______.

A. pitch B. surge C. sway D. roll 27. The officer of the watch should ______ comply with the Collision Rules． A. some times B. often C. at all times D. seldom 28. A vessel or seaplane on the water is considered to be underway when ______． A. She is at anchor B. She is made fast to shore C. She is aground D. Her anchor ceases to hold 29. In determining a safe speed ______ shall not be among those taken into account.

A. the characteristics，efficiency and limitation of the radar equipment B. any constraints imposed by the radar range scale in use

C. the effect on radar detection of the sea state，weather and other sources of interference D. the safe working load of the cranes both on board and ashore

30. Two vessels are approaching each other near head on. What action should be taken to avoid collision?

A. The first vessel to sight the other should give way B. The vessel making the slower speed should give way C. Both vessels should alter course to starboard D. Both vessels should alter course to port

31. The lights prescribed by the Rules shall be exhibited ______.

A. from sunrise to sunset in restricted visibility B. at all times C. from sunset to sunrise，and at no other time D. whenever a look-out is posted 32. A buoy marking a wreck will show a(n) ______.

A. white light FL (2) and a topmark of 2 black spheres B. occulting green light and may be lettered C. yellow light and will be numbered

D. continuous quick white light and may be numbered 33. ______ refers to the angle between true North and the heading line of the ship．

A. True position B. True meridian C. True course D. True bearing 34. A plane that cuts the Earth's surface and passes through the poles will always form ______ .

A. the equator B. a loxodromic curve C. a small circle D. a meridian 35. Neap tides occur ______.

A. at the start of spring，when the Sun is nearly over the equator

B. only when the Sun and Moon are on the same sides of the Earth and are nearly in line C. when the Sun and Moon are at approximately 90°to each other，as seen from the Earth

D. when the Sun，Moon，and Earth are nearly in line，regardless of alignment order 36. The height of a tide can be increased by ______ .

A. a storm surge B. a high pressure area C. the jet stream D. a cold front 37. The ship's tanks most effective for trimming are the ______.

A. deeps B. domestics C. peaks D. settlers 38. Which statement is TRUE of a tender vessel?

A. It has a large GM. B. Its period of roll is long. C. It has a very low center of gravity. D. It has a good transverse stability. 39. Reducing the liquid free surfaces in a vessel reduces the ______.

A. roll period B. metacentric height C. waterplane area D. vessel's draft 40. We usually choose cargo-handling equipment according to ______.

A. the ship type B. the port's organization C. the cargo's nature D. the dockers‘ ability 41. The Chief Officer ______ told the stevedores to stow the cargo lot by lot． A. plainly B. playfully C. absolutely D. completely 42. What is meant by the term TOPPING THE BOOM?

A. Lowering the boom B. Raising the boom C. Spotting the boom over the deck D. Swinging the boom athwartships 43. For a floating ship，true mean draft is always the ______. A. average of the observed drafts B. draft at the center of flotation

C. draft corresponding to the calculated displacement D. mean of the calculated drafts

44. The man directing and supervising the work of stevedores is the ________ .

A. local agent B. watchman C. docker D. foreman 45. Please stow the drums ______ ends． A. at B. in

C. on

D. by

46. If a void occurs in the cargo hold，it is better to ______ to control the broken stowage． A. brace it with dunnage B. cover it with large pieces C. fill it with small pieces D. leave it as it is 47. In Beaufort Scale，the wind force 7 with speed of 28-33 knots is defined as ______ . A. Moderate gale B. Near gale C. Strong gale D. Whole gale 48. When force of winds reaches 10-11 in Beaufort scale，we usually call such wind ______ . A. Gale B. Storm C. Hurricane D. Typhoon 49. In the Northern Hemisphere，a wind that shifts counterclockwise is a ________ . A. veering wind B. backing wind C. reverse wind D. chinook wind

50. The best estimate of the wind direction at sea level can be obtained from observing the direction of the ______.

A. cloud movement B. vessel heading C. waves D. swells 51. The primary wind belt which has the greatest effect on the set，drift，and depth of the equatorial currents is the ________ ．

A. doldrums B. horse latitudes C. trade winds D. prevailing westerlies 52. Structural bulkheads on a ship are usually ______.

A. continuous B. watertight C. transverse D. non-watertight

53. Bilge keels are fitted on ships to ______.

A. assist in drydock alignment B. improve the vessel's stability C. protect the vessel from slamming against piers D. reduce the rolling of the vessel 54. The purpose of a bilge well is to ______.

A. afford access to the shell through the double bottoms B. collect water to be pumped out

C. provide access for the pneumercator

D. provide a base line for sounding measurements

55. How would the exhaust of a properly operating diesel engine appear? ______.

A. Light blue haze B. Light brown haze C. perfectly gray haze D. Perfectly clear 56. For most ship engines，the fuel is ______. A. natural gas B. diesel oil C. propane D. bunker fuel

57. The \"Mode\" selector switch on the autopilot steering stand is used to select any of the following with the EXCEPTION of ________.

A. automatic pilot steering B. hand-electric steering C. non-follow-up steering D. rudder adjustment

58. Does current and drift affect the CPA/TCPA calculations on a true motion display?

A. Yes B. No C. Only a little bit D. Yes, very seriously 59. You are approaching a light fitted with a RACON. The light may be identified on the radar by ________ .

A. a dashed line running from the center of the scope to the light B. an audible signal when the sweep crosses the light C. a circle appearing on the scope surrounding the light

D. a coded signal appearing on the same bearing at a greater range than the light 60. You are using a radar in which your own ship is shown at the center，and the heading flash always points to 0°. If bearings are measured in relation to the flash，______ bearings are produced.

A. relative B. true C. compass D. magnetic 61. Magnetic compass deviation ______.

A. varies with the bearing used

B. is the angular difference between magnetic north and compass north C. is published on the compass rose on most nautical charts

D. is the angular difference between geographic and magnetic meridians 62. The compass deviation changes as the vessel changes ______.

A. geographical position B. speed C. heading D. longitude 63. The annual change in ______ is 0．2 degree． A. Magnetic Variation B. Marine Insurance C. Maritime Accident D. Mean High Water Spring . The GPS satellite orbits the earth in approximately ______.

A. 3 hours B. 6 hours C. 12 hours D. 24 hours 65. All echo-sounders can measure the ______.

A. actual depth of water B. actual depth of water below keel

C. average depth from waterline to hard bottom D. average depth of water to soft bottom 66. The AIS transponder is designed to transmit information ______.

A. Automatically B. Semi-automatically C. Manually D. AIS is not transmitting at all

67. What publication/s should a GMDSS Operator consult regarding the proper set-up and operation of vessel equipment?

A. ITU Publications

B. The manufacturers instruction manuals C. Part 90 of the FCC Rules and Regulations D. Code of Federal Regulations，Title 47，Part 80，Subpart W`

68. Which action should you take after sending a false distress alert on VHF?

A. Send a DSC cancellation message on Ch-70.

B. Make a voice announcement to cancel the alert on Ch-16. C. Make a voice announcement to cancel the alert on Ch-13. D. Make a voice announcement to cancel the alert on Ch-22A.

69. My vessel maneuvering ______ difficulty．Please keep well clear ______ me．

A. with，of B. in，of C. at，apart D. with，from 70. My Captain is trying to ______ the pilot station before the ebb tide．

A. steam B. proceed C. approach D. reach 71. RESULT OF SEARCH NEGATIVE means ______ .

A. the search has found nothing B. the derelict has been found C. the derelict has been located D. the derelict has been sighted

72. In the unlikely event that a distress situation allows you to send only a very short message, after distress signal would you first say ______?

A. Your name and call sign B. Your position C. The number of persons onboard D. The nature of the distress situation 73. The terms CEILING AND MARGIN PLATE are associated with the ________.

A. crew's quarters B. engine room C. main deck D. tank top

74. Placing a lashing across a hook to prevent a fitting from slipping out of the hook is called ______.

A. faking B. flemishing down C. mousing D. worming 75. The head block is located ________.

A. at the base of the boom B. at the head of the boom C. at the head of the mast D. on top of the jack staff 76. A spring line leads ______.

A. fore and aft from the ship's side B. to the dock at a right angle to the vessel C. through the bull nose or chock at the bow D. through the chock at the stern 77. Paints and solvents on a vessel should be ______.

A. stored safely at the work site until work is completed B. returned to the paint locker after each use

C. covered at all times to protect from ignition sources D. stored in a suitable gear locker 78. A distress signal ______.

A. consists of 5 or more short blasts of the fog signal apparatus B. consists of the raising and lowering of a large white flag C. may be used separately or with other distress signals

D. is used to indicate doubt about another vessel's intentions

79. You are standing the wheelwatch when you hear the cry，'Man overboard starboard side'. You should instinctively ______ .

A. give full right rudder B. give full left rudder C. put the rudder amidships D. throw a life ring to mark the spot 80. After using a C02portable extinguisher，it should be ______. A. put back in service if some C02remains B. hydrostatically tested C. retagged D. recharged 81. A fuel-air mixture below the lower explosive limit is too ______.

A. rich to burn B. lean to burn C. cool to burn D. dense to burn

82. Portable fire extinguishers must be provided for the cargo tank area of an unmanned tank barge ______ .

A. only when fully loaded B. if one or more tanks are full C. when transferring cargo D. only when the barge is being towed 83. After a liferaft is launched，the operating cord ______. A. serves as a sea painter B. detaches automatically C. is used to rig the boarding ladder D. is cut immediately as it is of no further use 84. In the first 24 hours after abandoning a vessel，water should be given only to personnel who are ______.

A. thirsty B. sick or injured C. wet D. awake

85. What should you do with your emergency position indicating radio beacon if you are in a lifeboat during storm conditions?

A. Bring it inside the liferaft and leave it on.

B. Bring it inside the liferaft and turn it off until the storm passes. C. Leave it outside the liferaft and leave it on. D. Leave it outside the liferaft and turn it off.

86. You discover a leak in the fuel line to the engine. You should FIRST ______.

A. activate the CO2 system B. make a temporary repair with canvas or tape C. start the bilge pump D. close the fuel valve at the tank 87. A crew member is unconscious and the face is flushed. You should ______.

A. lay the crew member down with the head and shoulders slightly raised B. administer a liquid stimulant

C. lay the crew member down with the head lower than the feet

D. attempt to stand the crew member upright to restore consciousness

88. A crew member has suffered frostbite to the toes of both feet. You should ______.

A. immerse the feet in warm water B. warm the feet with a heat lamp C. warm the feet at room temperature D. rub the feet

二、关联选择题（每组关联题题干下有4个小题，每小题4个选项） 第一组：

Major coast radio stations all over the world transmit, at regular intervals and in code, weather information for ships within range. Weather information consists of ten parts, of which ships usually make use of three, that is, warning, synoptic situation and forecast. With weather information, mariners are able to keep away from disastrous weather at sea and reduce the danger a great deal . As terrible weather is predicted, ships can take precautions beforehand, by delaying the voyage or seeking

shelter in a safe place. If there is a high sea or a long swell, they can take some measures to safeguard the cargo and the ship.

. Weather information for ships is usually transmitted by coast radio stations ______.

A. any time of the day B. at fixed time C. in different languages D. in some parts of the world

90. Coast radio stations generally provide weather information for ships ______.Ⅰ. in code Ⅱ. in a certain language Ⅲ. in written form

A. Ⅰ B. Ⅰ+Ⅱ C. Ⅱ D. Ⅰ+Ⅱ+Ⅲ 91. Weather information usually tells people something about weather ______.

A. afterwards B. in advance C. at the same time D. when there's bad weather 92. Of the following, ______ is not the way for ships to keep away from bad weather.

A. delaying voyage B. staying in port C. speeding up and running away D. pumping out ballast water

第二组：

A ship's head up, or un-stabilised, radar display has the ship's heading marker fixed at 000°, at the top of the screen. All targets, fixed or moving, then move relative to the ship's position in the centre of the screen and the heading marker. As the ship moves through the water, fixed targets appear to track down the screen on a reciprocal heading at the speed the ship is moving and when the ship alters course targets appear to rotate in the opposite direction to that of the ship, so targets appear to move on the radar screen while the ship's heading remains fixed. The coating on a radar display is designed to allow a certain amount of afterglow of targets, which in the ship's head up mode causes smearing and may make the identification of smaller targets difficult. In addition, when targets, particularly large landmasses, are in close proximity interference occurs, which can further inhibit the detection of small targets.

93. When radar is set to ship's head up display, all fixed targets displayed on the screen will appear to ______.

A. track down the screen on a reciprocal heading at the speed the ship is moving B. rotate in the same direction as the ship rotates C. make the identification of smaller targets difficult D. allow a certain amount of afterglow of targets

94. In the ship's head up mode, if the ship rotates starboard-wise all fixed targets on the screen will appear to ______.

A. rotate starboard-wise B. rotate port-wise C. remain stationary

D. move on a reciprocal heading at the speed the ship is moving 95. Afterglow of targets will ______.

A. have ship's heading marker fixed at 000° B. cause the fixed targets to remain fixed C. inhibit the detection of small target

D. make the identification of smaller targets difficult

96. It can be concluded that the instrument referred to in this passage is most likely a/an ______.

A. ordinary radar

C. specially designed radar B. APPA

D. radar which is out of order

中华人民共和国海事局 中华人民共和国海事局

2009年第1期海船船员适任统考试题（总第47期）

科目：航海英语 试卷代码：903 适用对象：无限航区、近洋航区船舶二、三副

（本试卷卷面总分100分，及格分为70，考试时间为100分钟）

答题说明：请选择一个最合适的答案，并将答案按答题卡要求，在相应位置上用2B铅笔涂

黑，第1题至第88题，每题1分，第题至第96题，每题1.5分。

单项选择题

you will find information about the duration of slack water in the_____. A.Tidal Current Tables B.Tidal Tables

C.Publications from CCS D.Sailing Directions

2. When a buoy is in position only during a certain period of the year,where may the dates when the buoy is in position be found?

A.Light List B.Notice to Mariners C.On the chart D.Coast Pilot 3. A line of position from a celestial observation is a segmeng of a______. A.circle of equal altitude B.parallel of declination C.parallel of altitude D.vertical circle

4. In very high latitudes,the most practical chart projection is the______.

A.Mercator B.gnomonic C.azimuthal D.Lambert conformal 5. Place names used should be those______.

A.specified by international authorities B.specified by national authorities

C.on the standard map D.on the chart or the Sailing Directions in use 6. Charted depth is the______.

A.vertical distance from the chart sounding datum to the ocean bottom,plus the height of tide B.vertical distance from the chart sounding datum to the ocean C.average height of water over a specified period of time D.average height of all low waters at a place

7. The changes in the channel‘s sounds and buoys on this coast are______this chart can not be considered as a safe guide of the channel.

A.frequent B.so frequent C.frequent that D.so frequent that

8. Defense plans may cause the operation of electronic aids to navigation to be suspended with______

A.no notice B.one day‘s notice C.a week‘s notice D.thiety(30) days notice

9. Owing to old date of the survey the positions and number of the beacons shown on this chart are not to be______

A.considered B.insured C.relied D.suspected of 10. All entries in Logbook, ______made,must not be erasedor amended.

A.once B.whether C.while D.just 11.The Master or person in charge of a ship is required to log______.

A.the names of all persons on board B.only the names of the crew number on board C.only the names of passengers on board C.information on emergency training drills 12.The vessal was drifted off from her______due to strong wind.

A.course B.track C.direction D.trend 13.If you do not wear goggles and helmet,your chances of being______will be greater. A.beaten B.damaged C.hurt D.stricken

14.With regard to the opening and closing of watertight integrity appliances not fitted with a remote operating control or alarm systerm,what must the Master or person in chanrge of a ship enter in the logbook?

A.The time required to cloes the appliances

B.The reason for opening or closing each appliance

C.The name of the person performing the opening and closing of such appliances D.The fact that the hull indicator functioned or not 15.The fire-protected lifeboats are found______.

A.being satisfied B.satisfying C.satisfactory D.satisfied

16.You are on watch and the Pilot has the conn. The Master has temporarily gone below. The Pilot orders a course change, which you are certain, will put the vessal into imminent danger. You first action should be to______.

A.countermand the order and immediately notify the Master

B.make an appropriate entry in the deck log concerning the Pilot‘s order C.immediately call the Master and await further orders from him D.immediately sound a short ring on the general alarm

17.How many operators are needed/required on board according to the provisions of the Interntional Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea,1974?

A.4 operators B.3 operstors C.2 operstors D.1 operators

18.In______convention, a vessal which carries more than 12 passengers shall be deemed as a passenger ship.

A.COSCO B.STCW C.SOLAS D.MARPOL

19.During fueling, all doors, hatches, and ports______.

A.to windward should be opened and the ones to leeward should be closed B.to leeward should be opened and the ones to leeward should be closed C.should be opened D.should be closed

20.The person on a ship who is responsible for maintaining the engine spaces in a clean and sanitary condition is the______.

A.Master, or person in charge

B.Chief Engineer, or engineer in charge if no chief engineer is required C.senior meachanic, or mechanic on duty if no senior mechanic designated D. senior electrician, or electrician on duty if no senior electrician designated 21.LIFTING THE ANCHOR FROM THE BOTTOM is called______. A.broaching the anchor B.shifting the anchor C.walking the anchor D.weighing the anchor 22.If you shorten the scope of anchor cable, your anchors‘s holding power______. A.decreases B.increases

C.remains the same D.has no relation to the scope 23.A ―spring line‖ is______.

A.any wire rope used for mooring B.a fire-warp

C.a mooring line running diagonally to the keel D.a mooring line perpendicular to the keel 24.Vessal towing with the current shall______tow more than tow boats and they must be towed alongside.

A.at times B.at any time C.at no time D.at moment

25.If a vessal under tow starts jumping on Its tow line, the most appropriate action to alleviate the conditions is to______.

A.charge course B.slow dowm C.have to D.adjust tow line length 26.You are heading in a northerly driection when you come aross an easterly current. Your vessal will______.

A.be pushed to starboard B.be pushed to port C.decrease in engine speed D.remain on course

27.Vessels shall be deemed to be in sight of one another only when one ______from the other. A.can be observed visually B.can be observed by radar C.can be locateed on the radar D.can be heard 28.Which vessal is underway according to the Rules? A.A vessal made fast to a single point mooring buoy B.A pures seiner(围网渔船)hauling her nets C.A pilot vessal at anchor

D.A vessal which has run aground

29.Every vessal shall proceed at a safe speed______the prevailing cricumstances and conditions. A.appropriate to B.used by C.liable to D.adaptation to

30.Two vessal are approaching each other near head on. What action should be taken to avoid collision?

A.The first vessal to sight the other should give way B.The vessal making the slower speed should give way C.Both vessal should alter course to starboard D.Both vessal should alter course to port

31.An anchored vessal on pilotage duty must show which light(s) at night? A.A sternlight only B.Anchor lights only

C.A white light over a red light only D.A white light over a red light and anchor lights 32.The positions and characterisitics of lights and buoys shown within the port area______. A.untrue B.impossible C.suspectful D.unimportant 33.You should polt your dead reckoning position______.

A.from every fix or running fix B.from every estimated position C.every three minutes in pilotage waters D.only in pilotage waters

34.During daylight saving time the meridian used for determining the time is located farther______. A.west in west longitude and east in east longitude B.east in west longitude and west in east longitude C.west D.east

35.The meaning of ―EBB TIDE‖ is that______.

A.tide is falling high water to low water B.tide is rising from low water to high water

C.tide is reaching to a highest level D.tide is reaching to a lowest level

36.When reversing, the tidal stream will have period with little or no effect.This is called the______. A.Rise B.Range C.Slack D.Spring 37.The mean draft of a ship is the draft______. A.midway between the forward and draft marks B.at the center of flotation C.at the load line

D.at the center of buoyancy

38.A semi submersible which will not ramain upright and will assume a list either to port or starboard is likely to have______.

A.a large TCG B.a negative GM C.excessive ballast D.insufficient deck load 39.If the metacentric height is large, a floating vessal will______.

A.be tender B.have a slow and easy motion C.be stiff D.have a tendency to yaw

40.The productivity of working shifts can be improved through a decrease of______. A.working hours B.gangs C.idle time D.weight per set 41.The necessity of the segregation of cargoes is detemined by______. A.experience from practice B.various types of cargoes C.different types of ship D.personal abilities

42.The Master or person in charge of a ship shall ensure the crane record book shows______. A.the name of the crane operator B.an entry each time the crane is used C.date and result of each rated load test D.the time of day of the test

43.the forward draft of you ship is 27‘-11 and the after draft is 29‘-03.The draft amidships is 28‘-05.Your vessel is______.

A.hogged B.sagged C.listed D.trimmed by the head 44.We‘ll adopt the mechanical tallying method______.

A.sonn or late B.soon or later C.sooner or late D.soon or later 45.Figure of cargo short-landed in______.

A.dispute B.argue C.debate D.discuss

46.As a general rule , tally clerks should make sheir tallying______.

A.in warehouses B.on deck C.ashore D.in the tallyroom

47.Mainly east 3 or 4 partly cloudy to overeast occasional rain ______ slowly south moderate or good. A.spreading B.proceeding C.bounding for D.going to

48.LOW AT 34N 135E EASLY SLWLY INTST NC. This description is most likely to be under the heading of______

A.GALE WNG B.GEN SYN C.STORM WNG D.TYPHOON WNG 49.F og is most commonly associated with a(n)______.

A.warm front at night B.low pressure area C.anticyclone D.lack of frontal activity 50.Cumulonimbus clouds are most likely to accompany a(n)______ A.high pressure system B.cold ftont

C.warm front D.occluded front

51.The fog most commonly encountered at sea is called______.

A.conduction fog B. radiation fog C.frontal fog D.advection fog

52.A DECK, SPACE, AREA, ETC, NOT PERMITTED TO BE ENTERED FOR SAFETY REASONS defines______.

A.Restricted area B.Closed area C.Prohibited place D.Forbidden place 53.For an upright vessel, draft is the vertical distance between the keel and the______. A.waterline B.freeboard deck C.plimsoll mark D.amidsships section 54.Frecboard is measured from the upper edge of the______.

A.bulkwark B.deck line C.gunwale bar D.sheer strake

55.The required portable radio apparatus on an international voyage must be stowed in______. A.the Master‘s quarters B.the ship‘s office C.the radio room , bridge , or protected location D.an unlocked cabinet next to the station bill

56.In comparison to electrie power , hydraulic power for jacking systemes has the advantage of______.

A.better control capabilities B.less maintenance and repair C.fewer personnel needed during jacking D.less prelonad needed 57.Limit switches are used on______?

A.sheath-screw davits B .gravity davits C.radial davits D.quadrantal davits

58.Which ARPA data should you use in order to detemine if a close quarter situation will develop with a target wessel?

A.Set and drift of the current B.Relative track information C.Predicted time of CPA D.Initial range of acquisition

59.Which statement is TRUE conceming a vessel equipped with operational radar ? A.She must use this equipment to obtain early warning of risk of collision B.The use of a radar excuses a vessel from the need of a look-out

C.The radar equipment is only required to be used in restricted visibility

D.The safe speed of such a vessel will likely be greater than that of vessels without radar

60.______ is on the panel of radar .

A.KEYLOCK B.REPEATER C.STATICINVERTER D.ANTI-CLUTTER-SEA 61.Which one of the followings is correct regarding the use of gyrocompass? A.Gyrocompass does not have to regarding the use of gyrocompass? B.Gyrocompass must be stopped when vessel alongside a berth. C.Gyrocompass needs to be checked from time to time.

D. Gyrocompass in not influenced by the latitude and ship‘s motion

62.IF the magnetic heading is greater than the compass heading , the deviation is______. A.east B.west C.north D. south 63.Deviation is the angle between the______. A.true meridian and the axis of the compass card B.true meridian and the magnetic meridian

C.magnetie meridian and the axis of the compass card D.axis of the compass card and the degaussing meridian

.What is important to remember when using AIS for collision avoidance? A.AIS may not give a complete picture of the traffic situation B.AIS is more accurate than ARPA C.AIS is not as accurate as ARPA

D.AIS is not allowed to be used for collision avoidance

65.The GPS satellite orbits the earth in approximately______. A.3 hours B.6 hours C. 12 hours D. 24 hours

66.When the gyro-pilot is used for steering , what control is adjusted to compensate for varying sea conditions______.

A.Rudder control B.Sea control C.Lost motion adjustment D.Weather adjustment 67.Which action shoud you take dfter sending a false distress alert on VHF? A.Send a DSC concellation message on CH-70.

B.Make a voice announcement to cancel the alert on CH-16. C.Make a voice announcement to cancel the alert on CH-13 D. Make a voice announcement to cancel the alert on CH-22A

68.What can be SART‘s audible tone monitor be used for ? It can beused to______. A.Informs survivors that assistance may be nearby .

B..Informs survivors when the battery‘s charge condition has weakened. C. Informs survivors when the SART switches to the standby mode. D. Informs survivors that a nearby vessel is signaling on DSC.

69.If you receive the signal over radiotelephone of ‗Romeo Papa Tango‘while using the International Code of Signais , you should______.

A.report to the caller B. report your last transmission C.continue since he received your last transmission D.end the transmission 70.My vessel maneuvering______difficulty .Please keep well clear______me. A.with , of B.in , of C.at , apart D.with , from

71.If you are transmitting distress message by radiotelephong you should______. A.use English language B.always use the Intemational Code

C.preface it by the word SOS D.follow the transmission with the radio alarm signal 72.What does the abbreviation VHF stang for?

A.Vessel‘s Hoisting Frequency B.Very High Safety C. Vessel‘s Homing Frequency D. Very High Frequency 73.On cargo booms, preventers are______.

A.auxiliary guys B.extra fair leads C.steel bands D.stops 74.Nylon line is NOT suitable for_____.

A.toeing B.lashings C.stoppers D.mooring lines 75.The term STANDING RIGGING refers to______. A.booms and kingposts B.guys and vangs

C.stays and shrouds D.topping lifys and cargo runners

76.A common class of wire rope used mooring is the 6×19 class.What does the‖6‖represent? A.Factor of safety B.Number of wies per strand C. Number of strands per wire D. Number of wies in the core 77.Paints and solvents on a vessel shuid be______. A.stored safely at the work site until work is completed B.retumed to the paint lockre after each use

C.covered at all times to protect form igniting sources D.stored in a suitable gear locke 78.A distress signal_____.

A.consists of 5 or more short blasts of the fog signal apparatus B. consists of the raisting ang lowering of a large white flag C.may be used separately or with other distress signals

D.is used to indicate doubt about another vessel‘s intentions

79.The commander of a rescue unit designated to co-ordinate search and reacue operations within a specified area is the______.

A.General commander B.Commander general

C.Search commander D.On-scene commander

80.After putting on a self-contained breathing apparatus, you open the air supply and hear a continuous ringing or a bell.What dose this mean?

A.The unit is working properly B.The face mask is not sealed properly C.The air bottle needs to be refilled D.The air supply hose has a leak 81.A self-contained breathing apparatus is used to______. A.make underwater repairs to barges

B.determine if the air in a tank is safe for men

C.enter areas that may contain dangerous fumes or lack oxygen D.resuscitatc an unconscious person

82.The major used of water in fighting fires is to______.

A.suffocate the fire B.absorb the oxygen supporting the fire C.act as a cooling agent D.wash the fire away

83.If the survival craft is not loaded to full capacity, the personnel should be______. A.loaded more on the port side forward

B.load equally on both sides with more forward C. load equally on both sides with more aft D.allowed to sit anywhere

84.After launching, an inflatable raft should be kept dry inside by______. A.opening the automatic drain plugs B.draining the water porkets

C.using the electric bilge pump D.using the bailers and cellulose sponge

85.What should you do with your energency position indicating radio beacon if you are in a lifeboat during storm conditions?

A.Bring it inside the liferaft and leave it on

B. Bring it inside the liferaft and turn it off until the storm passes C.Leave it outside the liferaft and leave it on D. Leave it outside the liferaft and turn it off

86.While loading bunkers, you notice oil on the water around your vessal. What should you do first? A.Stop loading B.Notify the Port Authority

C.Notify the terminal superintendent D.Determine the source of the oil 87.What is the proper first aid for LPG in the eye?

A.Apply an ice pack to the eye B.Keep the eyelid closed C.Flush the eye with plenty of water D.Rub the eye area clean 88.You should FIRST treat a simple fracture by______.

A.attempting to set the fracture B.preventing futher movement of the bone C.applying a tourniquet D.alternately applying hot and cold compresses

二、关联选择题（每组关联题题干下又4个小题，每小题4个选项） 第一组：

Major coast radio stations all over the world transmit, at regular intervals and in code, weather information for ships within range.Weather information consists of ten part, of which ships usually make use of three, that is, warning, synoptic situation and forecast. With waether information, mariners are able to keep away from disastrous waether at sea and reduce the danger a great deal. As terrible weather is predicted, ships can take precautions beforehand, by delaying the voyage or seeking shelter in a safe place. If there is a high sea or a long swell ,they can take some measures to safeguard the cargo and the ship.

.Weather information for ships is usually transmitted by coast radio stations______. A.any time of the day B.at fixed time

C.in different languages D.In some parts of the world

90.Coast radio stations generally provide weather information for ships______. Ⅰ.in code Ⅱ.in a certain language Ⅲ.in written form

A. Ⅰ B. Ⅰ+Ⅱ C. Ⅱ D. Ⅰ+Ⅱ+Ⅲ 91.Weather information usually tells people something about weather______. A.afterwards B.in advance

C.at the same time D.when there‘s bad weather

92.Of the following, ______is not the way for ships to keep away from bad weather. A.delaying voyage B.staying in port

C.speeding up and running away D.pumping out ballast water

第二组：

Generally a ship‘s motion contains components of pitch and roll simultaneously. Both these mations may cause the ship to head first to one side of its course, and then to the other. This is called yawing. When wave are sufficiently large, the whole vessal may be moved vertically up and dowm, this is called heave. Large waves passing under the ship from one side impart a side-to –side motion known as away. The movement of the whole ship ahead and astern is called surge. If the ship is under way, surge will cause a speeding-up and slowing-down of her forward motion. Just as the waves present at any moment and at any particular place on the surface of the sea are complex , because they are the product of large numbers of different wave motions, of different sizes and moving in different driections, so also the motion of the ship is complex, and is the product of components of each of

the six ship motions.

93.What does yawing mean in the passage? Ⅰ.Ship‘s angular motion about vertical axis Ⅱ.The ship first moves to one side of its course and then to the other Ⅲ.Ship‘s angular motion about longitudinal axis.

A. Ⅰ B. Ⅱ C.. Ⅲ D. ⅠorⅡ 94.Which one of the followings about surge is incorrect?

A.Surge is the ship‘s movement ahead and astern along longitudinal axis. B.Surge is caused by duty officer‘s improper manoeuring. C.Surge may cause ship‘s speed increased D. Surge may cause ship‘s speed decreased

95.Which of the following is the characteristics of waves? Ⅰ.Waves move in different direction Ⅱ.Waves are of different sizes and on the surface of the sea Ⅲ.Waves present at any moment A. Ⅰ B. Ⅱ C. Ⅲ D. Ⅰ+Ⅱ+Ⅲ 96.The best title for this passage may be______.

A.ship‘s motions B.waves and its impact C.waves‘ characteristics D.ship‘s rolling and pitchin 1-5: AAAAD 6-10: BDACA 11-15: DACCC 16-20: ADCDB 21-25: DACCD 26-30: AABAC 31-35: DAADA 36-40: CABCC 41-45: BAADA 46-50: BABAB 51-55: DAABC 56-60: ABBAD 61-65: CACAC 66-70: DBABA 71-75: ADABC 76-80: CBCDC 81-85: CCCDA 86-88: ACB -96: BABD DBDA

1. 你将在潮流表找到平流期的信息、

2. 当一个浮标只在一年中某段时间在这个位置 则浮标出现的时间记录在灯标表中 3. 来自天体观测的位置线是（天体）等高度圈的一段 4. 在高纬度地区实用的投影是 兰伯特投影

5. 船上使用的地名应是在海图或航路指南中使用的那些。 6. 海图标注水深是自潮高基准面到海底的垂直距离

7. 在这个海岸的航道沙底和浮筒变化的如此频繁以至于海图不能被认为是航道的安全指

南

8. 国防演习计划可能导致电子助航设备的运作在没有通知的情况下暂时关闭 9. 由于测量数据的老旧，这张海图上立标的位置和数量变得不可信 10. 所有航海日记中的记录一经填妥则必须不被擦除或修改 11. 船长或船舶的负责人被要求将应急训练信息记入航海日志 12. 船舶由于强风 漂离了它的航向

13. 假如你没有穿带护眼睛和安全帽，那么你被伤害的机会将会更大

14. 有关于打开或关闭一个没有装配遥控和警报和水密设备 应该记录船壳指示器运行或没

在运行的所有事实

15. 防火救生艇被发现是良好的

16. 你在值班 引航员也在 船长临时走开了 引航员给了一个舵令 你确定这个命令会导致

船舶进入一个紧迫危险。这时你首先该 取消命令并立即通知船长 17. 根据SOLAS公约的规定，船上必须要求配备一名操作员 18. 在SOLAS公约中，承载超过12名乘客的船将被视为客船 19. 在加装燃油其间，所有门窗，开口和舷窗应被关闭

20. 轮机长或其他值班轮机员来负责保持主机室的干净、清洁和卫生 21. 自海底提升起锚叫做起锚

22. 假如缩短锚链长度，锚的抓力减少 23. 倒缆是一条与龙骨倾斜的缆绳

24. 从事顺流拖带的船舶，所拖船应决不得超过两只，而且必须采用舷拖

25. 假如一船开始拖带时拖缆跳动，缓和这种情况的最合适做法是调整拖缆长度 26. 船首向正北 一个东向的流传过船舶 则船舶被推向右

27. 船舶应被认为处于互见中仅当能够自另一船在视觉上被看到时

28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. . 65. 66. 67. 根据规则哪一船在航？围网渔船正拖着网

每一艘船舶应用适合于当时环境和局面的安全速度航行

两船正各自在对方前方附近接近。应采取什么行动以避免碰撞？两船各自向右转 一艘从事引航服务的锚泊船夜间必须显示哪种灯光？上白下红和锚灯 港口区域内指示的灯标和浮筒的位置和特性不正确 你应该标出你船的推算船位 由每次定位或移线定位

在实现夏时制其间，用于确定时间的子午线位于更向东一些。 退潮的意义是潮水正在自高水位落到低水位

当回落的时候，潮流将会有一段时间很小或者几乎没有。这叫做平潮 平均吃水是在漂心上的吃水

一半浸没于水中的物体依然漂浮 假设它出现一个左或右的横倾 则很可能是有一个负的GM值

假如稳性高度很大，漂浮的船将不容易倾覆 工班的工作效率能够通过减少待时来提高 货物隔离的必要性取决于货物的不同类型

船长或者值班人员应该确保起重机的记录本显示每次额定负荷的结果和日期 首吃水27-11 尾29-03 中28-05 则为中拱 我们迟早（终究）会采用机械理货方法 货物的数字有争议

按常规（作为一般规则），理货员应在甲板理货

大部分地区东风，风力3到4级，局部多云转阴，时有雨并缓慢向南延伸，能见度中或良好

34N 135E处的低压东南缓慢移动，强度不变。这个描述很可能在标题为一般大势的下面

雾最普遍伴随着夜间的暖锋 积雨云最有可能伴随着冷锋

在海上最经常遇到的雾叫做平流雾

为安全理由，不允许进入的甲板，舱室，区域等定义为区 对于一艘正浮的船，吃水是自龙骨到水线的垂直距离 干舷是从甲板上缘的边缘开始测量的

便携式无线电设备应该存放在 无线电间 驾驶台 或其他保护区域 对比电子和液压 外壳系统 有更好的控制能力 限位开关用于 重力式吊艇架

如果在非常接近的情况下ARPA用于判断 相对轨迹信息 关于船舶配备的可用雷达，哪一个陈述正确？这设备必须被用于获得碰撞危险的早期警告

海浪抑制（近程增益）在雷达面板上

关于旋转罗盘的用途下面哪项正确？旋转罗盘需要经常被核查 如果磁首向大于罗经首向 则自差偏 东 自差是磁子午线与罗经盘的轴之间的角

当使用AIS 避免碰撞时应该记住什么是重要的？AIS 不能提供完全的交通形式图 全球定位通讯卫星围绕地球轨道运行大约12 小时

当操自动舵时 什么控制能调整弥补海浪条件 天气调整

在发送一个错误的遇险信号后 应该在16频道发表申明取消这个信号

68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86. 87. 88.

SART听觉监视器用于 通知周边的救援人员协助救援

假如当你使用国际信号码在无线电话上收到RPT时，你应重复你最后的发射（ 我船操纵困难。请远离（让清）我

假如你正在用无线电话发送遇险信息你应该使用英语 缩写词VHF代表什么？非常高的频率 在货船吊杆系统中，安全索是辅助稳索 尼龙绳不适合于 系固 固定索具包括 稳索和支索

6X19的钢丝绳6表示 钢丝绳的股数

船上的油漆和溶剂应在每次使用后放回油漆间、 遇险信号可以分开使用或与别的遇险信号一起使用

被指定为在特殊区域内进行协调救助的指挥员是现场指挥

在穿上自给式呼吸设备后，你打开空气供应开关并听到连续响起的笛声。这意味着什么？空气瓶需要被重新充装空气

自给式呼吸设备被用于进入一个可能含有有毒气体或氧气不足的区域 水消防的主要作用是 冷却

假如救生艇没有满载，船上的人员应在船尾并两舷相同重 放艇后 用水瓢和海绵使救生艇干燥

在暴风条件下 在救生艇如何指示位置 把它放在外面 保持开着的 当装载燃油时 你得知你船周围海面上有溢油 这时应该停止装载 液化石油气进入眼睛 首先要用水冲刷眼睛

对待骨折的首先措施是 防止受伤的骨头进一步错位移动

中华人民共和国海事局

2008年第6期海船船员适任统考试题（总第46期）

科目：航海英语 试卷代号：903

适用对象：无限航区，近洋航区船舶二、三副

（本试卷卷面总分100分，及格分数70分，考试时间100分钟）

答题说明：请选择一个最合适的答案，并将该答案按答题卡要求，在相应位置上用2B铅笔涂黑。第1题至88题，每题1分，第题至96题，每题1.5分。 一、单项选择题

1. Information on the opening times and characteristics of radiobeacons can be found in which

publications?

A. List of Light B. Coast Pilot C. Sailing Directions D. List of Radiobeacons 2. Mariners not entering the port are ______ to keep at least one mile off.

A. advised B. reported C. complied D. supplied 3. The velocity of the current in large coastal harbors is______.

A. predicted in Tidal Current Tables B. unpredictable

C. generally constant D. generally too weak to be of concern 4. A mercator chart is a______

A. cylindrical projection B. simple conic projection C. polyconic projection D. rectangular projection

5. Why does distance always have to be measured from the nearest scale on a Mercator chart?

A. Because it is the most efficient way B. Because it varies with the change of latitude C. Because it varies with the change of longitude D. Because it is the most straight line 6. Who is responsible for the voyage plan?

A. The person who has done the planning B. The master C. The navigation officer D. The owner 7. Charted depth is the______.

A. vertical distance from the chart sounding datum to the ocean bottom, plus the height of tide B. vertical distance from the chart sounding datum to the ocean bottom C. average height of water over a specified period of time D. average height of all low waters at a place

8. Defense plans may cause the operation of electronic aids to navigation to be suspended with

______.

A. no notice B. one day's notice C. a week's notice D. thirty (30)days notice

9. Periodic publications notifying change in, or additions to, previously published navigational date

are______.

A. Supplements B. Annual Summary C. Navigational Warning D. Notices to Mariners

10. ______is a full nautical record of a ship's voyage, written up at the end of each watch by the

officer of the watch.

A. Sea Protest B. Deck Log C. Accident Report D. Seaman's Book 11. Do you need to measure oxygen levels before entering an enclosed space?

A. Yes, always B. No

C. No if you measure for toxic gases

D. yes, but not if you ventilate properly first for 24 hours

12. The extent of the damage could not be ________though I inspected it with the Chief Stevedore

In charge.

A. sure B. contained C. ascertained D. applied

13. If you do not ware goggles and helmet, your chances of being _______will be greater.

A. beaten B. damaged C. hurt D. stricken

14. Before sailing, mariners on duty shall check the headings of magnetic compass by comparison

with__________.

A. ship‘s clock B. engine movement recorder C. repeaters D. navigation lights 15. Painting on _______ is prohibited because it will weaken its sensibility.

A. ship shell B. exterior of winches C. hydrostatic release D. hold ladders

16. You are on watch and the pilot has just anchored the vessel. The next thing that you should do

after the anchor has been let go is to_______.

A. stop the engines B. escort the pilot to the accommodation ladder C. plot the vessel‘s position on the chart D. make a round of the weather decks 17. SOLAS is the abbreviation of __________.

A. International Maritime Dangerous Goods Carried by Sea

B. International Code for the Construction and Equipment of ships Carrying Gases in Bulk C. International Convention for the Safety of life at Sea D. International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea 18. The SOLAS Convention was developed by the_________.

A. IMDG conference B. American Bureau of Shipping

C. International Maritime Organization D. American Institute of Maritime Shipping 19. How to determine the density of the slop after tank washing?

A. By use of an interferometer B. By use of a hydrometer C. By use of an interface D. By use of a thermometer

20. Any discharge into the sea of oil or oily mixtures from ships to which this Annex of MARPOL

73/78 applies shall be _______except when special conditions are satisfied. A. required B. requested C. promoted D. prohibited 21. To EASE A LINE means to ________.

A. cast off B. double up so that one line does not take all the strain C. pay out line to remove most of the tension D. slack it off quickly 22. Finally, when your ship is alongside, don‘t forget__________.

A. having rat guards properly mounted on your moorings B. to have rat guards properly mounted on your moorings C. to have rat guards properly mounted at your moorings D. having rat guards properly mounted on your moorings

23. THE SPEED OF A VESSEL ADJUSTED TO THAT OF A PILOT BOAT AT WHICH THE

PILOT CAN SAFELY EMBARK is _______.

A. Ground speed B. Boarding speed C. Relative speed D. Speed of the vessel

24. If you have steel wire ropes leading in the same direction with other ropes, which will take the

most of the load?

A. Steel wire rope B. Manila C. Nylon D. Polypropylene rope 25. Heave is motion along the______.

A. longitudinal axis B. transverse axis C. Vertical axis D. centerline axis 26. The side of a ship which is farther from the winds is______.

A. fairway side B. open sea side C. lee side D. roadstead side

27. A vessel is considered to be restricted in her ability to maneuver under the rules if she is______.

A. at anchor B. mine-clearing C. engaged in fishing D. engaged in towing 28. Vessels shall be deemed to be in sight one another only when one ______ from the other.

A. can be observed visually B. can be observed by radar C. can be located on the radar D. can be heard

29. Every vessel shall proceed at a safe speed ______ the prevailing circumstances and conditions.

A. adapted to B. used by C. liable to D. adaptation to 30. An overtaken vessel means a vessel______.

A. which has been overtaken by another vessel B. which is going to be overtake another vessel C. which has overtaken another vessel

D. which is going to be overtaken by another vessel

31. An anchored vessel on pilotage duty must show which light(s) at night?

A. A sternlight only B. Anchor lights only

C. A white light over a red light only D. A white light over a red light and anchor lights 32. What is the characteristic of a quick light?

A. show group of 2 or more flashes at regular intervals B. Durations of light and darkness are equal C. Shows not less than 60 flashes per minute

D. Shows quick flashes for about 5 seconds followed by a 1 second dark period

33. A SEAMARK, LE. A BUOY, INDICATING THE NORTH, EAST, SOUTH OR WEST

FROM A FIXED POINT, E. G. A WRECK is______.

A. Entrance buoy B. New buoy C. Port buoy D. Cardinal buoy 34. A line connecting all possible of your vessel at any given time is a______.

A. Longitude line B. Latitude line C. Line of position D. Fix 35. Spring tides are tides that______.

A. have lows lower than normal and highs higher than normal B. have lows higher than normal and highs lower than normal C. are unpredictable

D. occur in the spring of the year 36. Spring tide occur______.

A. when the moon is new or full

B. when the moon and sun have declination of the same name C. only when the moon and sun are on the same sides of the earth D. at the beginning of spring when the sun is over the equator 37. Deballasting a double bottom has what effect on KG?______.

A. KG is increased B. KG is decreased

C. KG is not affected D. KG increases at light drafts and decreases at deep drafts 38. The difference between the initial trim and the trim after loading is known as______.

A. trim B. change of trim C. final trim D. change of draft

39. A semisubmersible which will not remain upright and will assume a list either to port or to

starboard is likely to have______.

A. a large TCG B. a negative GM C. excessive ballast D. insufficient deck load 40. What is the main purpose of dunnage?

A. To act as ballast for light vessels B. To provide ventilation and drainage for cargo C. To secure the tarpaulins in place D. to support weakened bulkheads

41. All the holds to be loaded with grain must be swept ______commencement of loading.

A. cleanly/during B. clear/meanwhile C. clean/between D. clean/prior to 42. Protection of cargo against tainting damage can best be obtained by______.

A. Ventilating the space B. Not ventilating the space

C. Proper use of paper separation and dunnage D. Segregation of cargo by using different hatches

43. A ship's forward draft is 22′04\"and its after draft is 23′00\". The draft amidships is 23′04\". This

indicates a concentration of weight______.

A. at the bow B. in the lower holds C. amidships D. at the ends

44. Foreman, the ship ______, please get the stevedores to fill the port wings with heavier package.

A. lists to starboard B. is shifting to starboard C. is inclined to starboard D. is listing to starboard

45. You are kindly requested to supply the necessary tallyman to do ______on board the ship during

the discharging of the cargo.

A. the tallying work B. the lashing work

C. the cleaning work D. the work of opening and closing hatches

46. During loading or discharging, the tallymen must make contact with ______on duty so as to

solve problems on time.

A. ship owner B. ship's officers C. shippers D. consignors

47. CAPE WEST WIND WEST TO SOUTHWEST 15 TO 20 KNOTS WEATHER SHOWERS.

This description is likely to be under the heading of_______. A. FORECAST B. STORM WARNING C. GENERAL SITUATION D. MAP ANALYSIS 48. When air is at its dew point it______.

A. will contain no additional moisture B. has the lowest relative humidity C. cannot keep up its moisture D. has a low absolute humidity 49. ______causing strong winds and rough sea north west bay of Biscay

A. strong low pressure B. strong high pressure C. steep pressure gradients D. steep gradients pressure 50. In the doldrums you will NOT have______.

A. high relative humidity B. frequent showers and thunderstorms C. steep pressure gradients D. frequent calms

51. The best estimate of the wind direction at sea level can be obtained from observing the direction

of the______

A. cloud movement B. vessel heading C. waves D. swells 52. Most propellers on merchant vessels are constructed of______.

A. manganese bronze B. cast iron C. mild steel D. improved plow steel 53. The collision bulkhead is located______.

A. on the bridge deck B. between the passenger and cargo areas C. at the stern of the ship D. as the first watertight bulkhead ahead 54. Which is the summer load waterline on the load waterline mark? ______.

A. The first line at the bottom B. The second line from the bottom C. The third line from the bottom D. The fourth line from the bottom 55. All marine low-speed diesels are of what design?

A. Four-stroke B. Two-stroke C. Electronic ignition D. Forced exhaust 56. The holding capability of an anchor is primarily determined by the______.

A. shape of the anchor B. stowage of the anchor on board C. anchor's ability to dig in D. size of the vessel and its draft

57. The required portable radio apparatus on an international voyage must be stowed in______.

A. the Master's quarters B. the ship's office

C. the radio room, bridge, or protected location D. an unlocked cabinet next to the station bill

58. A radar range to a small, charted object such as a light will provide a line of position in the form

of______.

A. straight line B. Arc C. parabola D. Hyperbola 59. ______is on the panel of radar.

A. KEYLOCK B. REPEATER

C. STATIC INVERTER D. ANTI-CLUTTER-SEA

60. Does current and drift affect the CPA/TCPA calculations on a true motion display?※

A. Yes B. No C. Only a little bit D. Yes, very seriously

61. If the magnetic heading is greater than the compass heading, the deviation is______.※

A. east B. west C. north D. south 62. Deviation is the angle between the______.

A. true meridian and the axis of the compass card B. true meridian and the magnetic meridian

C. magnetic meridian and the axis of the compass card

D. axis of the compass card and the axis of the compass card 63. Variation is a compass error that you______.

A. can correct by adjusting the compass card

B. can correct by adjusting the compensating magnets C. can correct by adjusting the vessel's heading D. cannot correct

. How much can the AIS broadcast made be overloaded without any significant operational

effect?※

A. 50-100% B. 200-300% C. 400-500% D. No overload is accepted 65. Which statement concerning GPS is TRUE?

A. It cannot be used in all parts of the world.

B. There are 12 functioning GPS satellites at present. C. It may be suspended without warning.

D. Two position lines are used to give a 2D fix.

66. The GPS satellite orbits the earth in approximately______.※

A. 3 hours B. 6 hours C. 12 hours D. 24 hours

67. The maritime radio system consisting of a series of coast stations transmitting coastal warning is

called______.

A. NAVTEX B. HYDROLANT/HYDROPAC C. NAVAREA D. SAFESEA 68. Which action should you take after sending a false distress alert on VHF?

A. send a DSC cancellation message on Ch-70.

B. make a voice announcement to cancel the alert on Ch-16 C. make a voice announcement to cancel the alert on Ch-13 D. Make a voice announcement to cancel the alert on Ch-22A 69. RESULT OF STARCH NEGATIVE means______.

A. the search has found nothing B. the derelict has been found C. the derelict has been located D. the derelict has been sighted

70. If you receive the signal over radiotelephone of \"Romeo Papa Tango\" while using the

International code of signals, you should______. A. report to the caller

B. repeat your last transmission

C. continue since be received your last transmission D. end the transmission

71. The generators on your ship have shut down. leaving you without navigation lights. Which

emergency signal would you transmit over the VHF radio to alert vessels in the area of your predicament?

A. Mayday Mayday Mayday B. Pan Pan Pan

C. Security Security Security D. lights out lights out lights out 72. The pilot(embarked)the ship at 1830 hours

A. boarded B. left C. piloted D. loaded

73. Cleaning, painting and repairing work is known as______.

A. maintenance work B. lashing work C. tallying work D. overtime work

74. The lines forward from the bow and aft from the stern when a vessel is moored to the dock are

______.

A. bow and stern lines B. breast lines C. halyards D. warps

75. A common class of wire rope used for mooring is the 6×19 class. What does the 6 represent?

A. Factor of safety B. number of wires per strand C. number of strands per wire rope D. number of wires in the core 76. It is NOT advisable to use nylon for alongside towing because it______.

A. stretches too much B. is too difficult to make fast C. parts too readily D. is too susceptible to mildew 77. The end of the joint with the exterior threads is called the______.

A. pin B. stem C. box D. stand

78. An orange flag showing a black circle and square is a______.

A. signal indicating a course change

B. distress signal of asking to communicate with another vessel C. signal of asking to communicate with another vessel D. signal indicating danger

79. The following information may not be required to be communicated to a distressed craft?

A. Own vessel identity, call sign, name and position B. Own vessel speed and ETA to distressed craft

C. distressed crafts true bearing and distance from ship D. Rescue award if successful

80. A fuel-air mixture below the lower explosive limit is too______.

A. rich to burn B. lean to burn C. cool to burn D. dense to burn 81. Which of the following materials has the best heat conduction?

A. gas B. liquid C. metal D. wood

82. A self-contained breathing apparatus is used to______.

A. make underwater repairs to barges

B. determine if the air in a tank is safe for men

C. enter areas that may contain fumes or lack oxygen D. resuscitate an unconscious person

83. What should you do with your emergency position indicating radio beacon if you are in a

lifeboat during storm conditions?※

A. Bring it inside the liferaft and leave it on.

B. Bring it inside the liferaft and turn it off until the storm passes. C. Leave it outside the liferaft and leave it on. D. Leave it outside the liferaft and turn it off.

84. After launching, an inflatable raft should be kept dry inside by ______.

A. opening the automatic drain plugs B. draining the water pocket

C. using the electric bilge pump D. using the bailers and cellulose sponge 85. ______ is the most visible signal of distress from a lifeboat at sea in the daytime.

A. Smoke signal B. Flash signal C. Fire signal D. Radio emergency transmission 86. Most minor spills of oil products are caused by ______.

A. equipment failure B. human error

C. major casualties D. unforeseeable circumstances 87. You should FIRST treat a simple fracture by ______.※

A. attempting to set the fracture B. preventing further movement of the bone C. applying a tourniquet D. alternately applying hot and cold compresses 88. What is the proper first aid for LPG in the eye?

A. Apply an ice pack to the eye. B. Keep the eyelid closed. C. Flush the eye with plenty of water. D. Rub the eye area clean. 二、关联题（每组关联题题干下有4个小题，每小题有4个选项） 第一组

A ship‘s head up, or un-stabilised, radar display has the ship‘s heading marker fixed at 000°, at the top of the screen. All targets, fixed or moving, then move relative to the ship‘s position in the center of the screen and the heading marker. As the ship moves through the water, fixed target appear to track down the screen on a reciprocal heading at the speed the ship is moving and when the ship alters course targets appear to rotate in the opposite direction to that of the ship, so targets appear to move on the radar screen while the ship‘s heading remains fixed. The coating on a radar display is designed to allow a certain amount of afterglow（余辉）of targets, which in the ship‘s head up mode causes smearing（拖尾）and may make the identification of smaller targets difficult. In addition, when targets, particularly large landmasses, are in close proximity interference occurs, which can further inhibit the detection of small targets.

. When radar is set to ship‘s head up display, all fixed targets displayed on the screen will appear to

______.

A. track down the screen on a reciprocal heading at the speed the ship is moving B. rotate in the same direction as the ship rotates C. make the identification of smaller targets difficult D. allow a certain amount of afterglow of targets

90. In the ship‘s head up mode, if the ship rotates starboard-wise all fixed targets on the screen will

appear to ______.

A. rotate starboard-wise B. rotate port-wise

C. remain stationary D. move on a reciprocal heading at the speed the ship is moving 91. Afterglow of targets will ______.

A. have the ship‘s heading marker fixed at 000° B. cause the fixed targets to remain fixed C. inhibit the detection of small targets

D. make the identification of smaller targets difficult

92. It can be concluded that the instrument referred to in this passage is most likely a/an ______.

A. ordinary radar B. ARPA

C. specially designed radar D. radar which is out of order 第二组

The Chief Officer, or First Mate as he is often called, is the Master‘s chief officer and head of the Deck Department. He is assisted by a Second Officer(Mate) and a Third Officer(Mate), and sometimes a Fourth Officer(Mate). Several companies employ a First Officer as well as a Chief Officer. The Deck Department also includes a Boatswain (Bosun) and a Carpenter，both petty officers，and a number of ratings. These made up of Able Seamen (AB)，Ordinary Seamen (OS) and a middle grade known as Efficient Deck Hands (EDH). There are other grades of seamen. On some ships Navigating Cadets are carried for training purposes. The Chief Engineer is head of the Engine Department. He is assisted by a Second，Third，Fourth and sometimes Fifth Engineer. An Electrical Officer may also be carried. The engine room petty officers are the Storekeeper and Donkeyman. On tankers there is also a Pumpman. He is also a petty officer. The engine room ratings are Firemen and Greasers. There may also be Engineer Cadets. The Catering Department is under the Chief Steward. It is divided into a saloon and galley section. The former is headed by the Second Steward，the latter by the Ship's Cook. They are both usually petty officers. They are assisted by several stewards and cooks，and by a number of junior ratings. The Radio Department often consists of only one man: the Radio Officer. On ships where continuous radio watches are kept there may be three radio officers: a Chief，Second and Third.

93. ________ is not a petty officer.

A. Boatswain B. Second Steward C. Radio Officer D. Storekeeper 94. EDH is rank which is higher than________.

A. Second Steward B. AB C. OS D. Chief Engineer 95. Storekeeper belong to ________.

A. Deck Dept B. Engine Dept C. Catering Dept D. Radio Dept 96. There are ________ departments on bard a big ship according to the passage.

A. two B. three C. four D. five

期数：46 试卷代号：903 题号--答案 题号--答案 题号--答案 题号--答案 题号--答案 1--A 2--A 3--A 4--A 5--B 6--B 7--B 8--A 9--D 10--B 11--A 12--C 13--C 14--C 15--C 16--C 17--C 18--C 19--B 20--D 21--C 22--B 23--B 24--A 25--C 26--C 27--B 28--A 29--A 30--A 31--D 32--C 33--D 34--C 35--A 36--A 37--A 38--B 39--B 40--B 41--D 42--D 43--C 44--D 45--A 46--B 47--A 48--A 49--C 50--C 51--C 52--A 53--B 54--B 55--B 56--C 57--C 58--B 59--D 60--B 61--A 62--C 63--D --C 65--C 66--C 67--A 68--B 69--A 70--B 71--C 72--A 73--A 74--A 75--C 76--A 77--A 78--B 79--D 80--B 81--C 82--C 83--A 84--D 85--A 86--B 87--B 88--C --A 90--B 91--D 92--A 93--C 94--C 95--B 96--C 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42.

雷康的信息都在灯标表中

航海者不进入港口被建议最少保持1海里的距离 在大的港区内的流速是在潮汐表里预测好的 Mercator海图是一种利用圆柱投影制成的海图

为什么在莫卡托海图上距离总是由最近的比例测量，因为它与每个纬度成比例 谁负责航行计划？船长

海图标注水深是自潮高基准面到海底的垂直距离

国防演习计划可能导致电子助航设备的运作在没有通知的情况下暂时关闭 定期发布预先公布的航海信息的变化或增加的通告是航海通告 航海日记是船舶航次的完全记录，由值班驾驶员在每班结束时填写 当你进入一个密闭空间前你需要测量氧气浓度吗？是的，总是这样 虽然我和负责的工头已检查过，但不能够确定损坏的程度

假如你没有穿带护眼睛和安全帽，那么你被伤害的机会将会更大

在开航之前，值班驾驶员应核对比较磁罗经艏向和电罗经复示器的艏向‘ 在静水压力释放器上涂漆是被禁止的，因为它将会减弱灵敏度

你在值班并且引航员抛锚了船舶。在抛锚后你应该标绘船舶在海图上的位置 SOLAS是国际海上人命安全公约的缩写 海上人命安全公约被国际海事组织发展而来

怎样判断洗舱后费油的密度？通过使用液体比重计

MARPOL 73/78公约本附录适用的任何从船上排入海中油或油的混合物应被禁止，除了当特殊的条件令人满意时

释放绳子的意思就是：送出缆绳移除最大的张力

最后，当你靠泊时别忘了将防鼠档适当地安放在系泊绳上

船的速度调整到能够使引水员从引水船安全登船的速度叫登船速度

如果你让钢丝绳和别的绳索导向同一个方向，哪个承担的负荷最大？钢丝绳 垂荡是沿垂直轴的运动 船离风更远的一舷叫下风舷

按照规则，一船被认为是操限船当她正在进行清除水雷作业时 船舶应被认为处于互见中仅当能够自另一船在视觉上被看到时 每一艘船舶应用适合于当时环境和局面的安全速度航行 被追越船意思是被他船追越的船

一艘从事引航服务的锚泊船夜间必须显示哪种灯光？上白下红和锚灯 快闪的性质：每分钟不少于60闪

一个航标，也就是显示一个固定点如一个沉船的北，东，南或西方向的是方位标 在给定时刻你船所有可能船位的连线是位置线

大潮表示：落潮时比普通更低 涨潮时比一般高潮高 （我擦！又没题目）

排放双层底的压舱水对KG的影响是KG被增大

(吃水)纵倾变化可以被简单的定义为在首尾吃水差别方面的变化

一个倾斜的半潜体固定在一个倾斜角并有很短的横摇周期很可能是重心横向距中有一个距离

垫舱物料可被用于保护由于船体汗水导致的货物损坏或损失 所有准备装载谷物的货舱必须在开始装货之前被清洁干净 保护货物免受污染可以最好通过使用不同的货舱隔离来获得

43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. . 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 一艘船艏吃水22'04\"艉吃水23'00\"。船舯吃水23'04\"。这说明重量集中在船舯 工头，船舶正向右倾斜，请让工人用重货将左边的上甲板外侧填装满 在卸货其间，请求你安排必要的理货员在船上进行理货工作

海角西面西到西南风15到20节，阵雨。这描述很可能在气象预报的标题下 当空气在其露点温度时将不能包含更多的水气 陡峭的气压梯度导致Biscay的西北大风大浪 在赤道无风带将不具有陡峭的气压梯度 在赤道无风带将没有 陡峭的气压梯度

最好的估计风向的方法是根据获得的观测海浪的方向 大多数商船的螺旋桨用锰青铜制成 防撞舱壁坐落于旅客和货仓之间

在载重线标记处哪一个是夏季载重线？自底往上的第三条线 所有的低转速柴油机都被设计成 两冲程的 锚的抓力首先取决于锚插入底部的能力

便携式无线电设备在远洋航行中必须存放在 无线电间、驾驶台、或者其他受保护地方 雷达量程较小，海图物标诸如灯标将提供一条什么样式的位置线？圆弧 海浪抑制（近程增益）在雷达面板上

海流和漂流在真运动显示上影响计算CPA/TCPA 吗 如果磁首向大于罗经首向，则自差偏 东 自差是磁子午线与罗经盘的轴之间的角 磁差是不能被改正的

AIS 超负荷播发多大没有任何重大操作影响、

下列有关GPS说明正确的是 它的中断是不伴随有警报的 全球定位通讯卫星围绕地球轨道运行大约12 小时

海事无线电系统内一系列有关海岸发送的警报叫做 NAVTEX

在用VHF发送一个错误的遇险警报之后 你应该在16频道发布一个公告取消那个错误警报

搜索结果否定意思是没有搜索到任何东西

假如当你使用国际信号码在无线电话上收到RPT时，你应重复你最后的发射（内容） 电机已经关闭了，并且没有航海灯，这时应该发送安全安全安全的警报 引水员已在1830时{登船}

清洁，油漆和修理工作叫做维修工作

当船舶系泊在码头时，从船首向前和从船尾向后引出的缆绳叫船首缆和船尾缆 6X19的钢丝绳 6表示钢丝绳的股数

使用尼龙绳进行旁拖是不可取的因为尼龙绳伸展性太强 连接处末端的外套叫做 销：PIN

一面橙色的旗帜 上面显示一个黑球一个菱形 表示遇险信号

和一个遇险航空器联系，下列哪个信息可以不需要？成功后的营救奖品 燃油空气混合低于爆炸极限是过稀燃烧 这些材料中哪一个最容易导热？金属、

自给式呼吸设备被用于进入一个可能含有有毒气体或氧气不足的区域

如果你的救生艇在风暴条件下 用雷康显示你的紧急位置：把它放在艇外 让它打开着 在放艇后，用水瓢和海绵保持救生筏的干燥

白天在海上从救生艇发出遇险信号最容易看到的是烟雾信号

86. 大多数局部的油泄漏是由于人为的过失引起的

87. 对待骨折首先采取的行动是 防止骨头进一步的移动 88. 当液化石油气进眼睛了 首先要 用一定量的水冲刷眼睛

中华人民共和国海事局

2008年第1期海船船员适任证书全国统考试题（总第45期）

科目：航海英语 试卷代号：903 适用对象：无限航区、近洋航区二/三副

(本试卷卷面总分100分，及格分为70分，考试时间100分钟)

答题说明：请选择一个最合适的答案，并将该答案按答题卡要求，在相应位置上用2B铅笔涂黑．

第1题至88题，每题1分，第题至96题，每题1．5分。

一．单项选择题

1． Data relating to the direction and velocity of rotary tidal currents can be found in the______.

A．Mariner‘s Guide B．Tidal Current Tables C．Nautical Almanac D．Tide Tables 2． Light Lists for coastal waters are ______．

A．published every year and require no corrections B．published every second year and must be corrected C．published every five year and require no corrections D．accurate thru NM and must be corrected 3． The light vessel is reported ______．

A．to be destroyed B．to be demolished C．to be ruined D．to be spoiled 4． The buoy symbol printed on your chart is leaning to the northeast. This indicates ______.

A．you should stay to the north or east of the buoy B．you should stay to the west or south of the buoy C．the buoy is a major lighted buoy

D．nothing special for navigational purposes 5． When should voyage planning be done?

A．During the sailing B．Prior to sailing

C．After sailing D．Before the pilot is leaving 6． The revision date of a chart is printed on which area of the chart?

A．Top center B．Lower-left corner

C．Part of the chart title D．Any clear area around the neat line 7． Solid green arrows on the main body of a pilot chart indicate______．

A．prevailing wind directions B．prevailing ocean current directions C．probable surface current flow D．shortest great circle routes 8． ______ are published for the correction of Admiralty Charts．

A．Admiralty Sailing Directions B．Admiralty List of Signals

C．Mariner‘s Handbook D．Admiralty Notices to Mariners 9． Owing to old data of the survey the positions and number of the beacons shown on this chart are not to be ______ s．

A．considered B．insured C．relied upon D．suspected 10．The proper way to correct a mistake in the logbook is to______．

A．erase the entry and rewrite

B．draw several lines through the entry, rewrite, and initial the correction C．completely black out the entry, rewrite, and initial the correction D．draw one line through the entry, rewrite, and initial the correction 11．It‘s ______ that the cargo was damaged by your stevedores．

A．bright B．distinct C．plain D．evident 12．The {said} accident was caused by your ship．

A．sailing B．damaged C．sounded D．abovementioned

13．ACCIDENTAL ESCAPE OF OIL OUT OF A TANK WHEN IT GETS TOO FULL BECAUSE PUMPING WA NOT STOPPED IN TIME defines ______．

A．Overloading B．Over discharging C．Overflow D．Overtaking

14．With regard to the opening and closing of watertight integrity appliances not fitted with a remote

operating control or alarm system, what must the Master or person in charge of a ship enter in the logbook? A．The time required to close the appliances

B．The reason for opening or closing each appliance

C．The name of the person performing the opening and closing of such appliances D．The fact that the hull indicators functioned or not

15．We test the water spray fire protection system of fire-protected lifeboats every 3 month, ______ the abandon ship drill．

A．combining with B．combined with C．combining to D．combined to 16．Vessel must be ______duly qualified officers and crew．

A．supplied with B．equipped by C．manned with D．fitted with 17．The port of registry is ______．

A．not required to be marked anywhere on the vessel B．required to be marked on both bows and on the keel

C．required to be marked on the stern with the name of the vessel marked on both bows D．required to be marked on the keel, stern, and both bows

18．In accordance with SOLAS, the batteries that power interior lighting in inflatable liferafts can be

made to last longer by ______．

A．unscrewing the bulb during the daylight B．switching the light on only when necessary

C．taking no action as there is no way on saving power

D．taking no action as the shut off automatically in daylight

19．While operating your oceangoing vessel you must keep a record of any discharge or disposal op garbage. These entries shall be made ______．

A．before the end of the voyage B．before arriving at your next port

C．no later than 24 hours after disposal of the garbage D．at the time the garbage was disposed of 20．Your oceangoing vessel is required to have a waste management plan. This plan must be in writing and describe procedures for ______．

A．collecting and discharging garbage

B．disposing waste from marine sanitation devices

C．reducing the amount of shipboard waste

D．segregating the different types of shipboard waste

21．In a river subject to tidal currents, the best time to dock a ship without the assistance of tugs is ______．

A．at high water B．when there is a following current C．at slack water D．at flood

22．Usually, do not use more than ______ complete rope turns around the drum．

A．1-2 B．3-4 C．5-6 D．7-8

23．You are docking a vessel. Wind and current are most favorable when they are ______．

A．crossing your course in the same direction B．crossing your course in opposite directions C．parallel to the pier from ahead D．setting you on the pier

24．Masters are required to notify Port Authorities of anchorage bearings after ______．

A．departure B．leaving C．anchored D．anchoring 25．A look-out should report objects sighted using ______．

A．true bearings B．magnetic bearings C．gyro bearings D．relative bearings 26．Apparent wind speed blowing across a vessel under tow can be measured by a(n) ______．

A．barometer B．wind vane C．anemometer D．thermometer 27．A light signal consisting of three flashes means ______．

A．I am in doubt as to your actions B．My engines are full speed astern C．I desire to overtake you D．I am operating astern propulsion

28．The rules state that vessels may depart from the requirements of the Rules when ______．

A．there are no other vessels around B．operating in a narrow channel

C．the Master enters it in the ship‘s log D．necessary to avoid immediate danger 29．Sailing vessels are stand-on over power-driven vessels except ______．

A．in a crossing situation B．in a meeting situation

C．when they are the overtaking vessel D．on the inland waters of the PR China

30．If there is sufficient sea room, alteration of ______ may be the most effective action to avoid close-quarters situation．

A．speed and course B．speed alone C．course alone D．speed or course 31．The Routing System which aimed at reducing the risk of casualties is called as ______．

A．Traffic Separation Schemes B．Recommended tracks C．Precautionary areas D．Inshore traffic zones 32．The period of a lighted aid to navigation refers to the ______．

A．date of construction or establishment B．length of time between flashes of the light C．time required for the longest flash of each type D．time required for the light to complete each cycle

33． ______ refers to the angle between true North and the heading line of the ship．

A．True position B．True meridian C．True course D．True bearing 34．A dead reckoning (DR) plot ______．

A．ignores the effect of surface currents B．is most useful when in sight of land C．must be plotted using magnetic courses D．may started at an assumed position 35．Mean high water is the average height of ______．

A．the higher high waters B．the lower high waters

C．the lower of the two daily tides D．all high waters 36．What does the term ―tide‖ refer to?

A．Horizontal movement of the water B．Vertical movement of the water C．Mixing tendency of the water D．Salinity content of the water

37．After transferring a weight forward on a vessel, the draft at the center of flotation will ______．

A．change, depending on the location of the LCG B．increase

C．decrease D．remain constant 38．Unstable equilibrium exists at small angles of inclination when ______．

A．G is above M B．G is off the centerline C．B is off the centerline D．B is above G

39．Reducing the liquid free surfaces in a vessel reduces the ______．

A．roll period B．metacentric height C．waterplane area D．vessel‘s draft 40．Broken stowage must be reduced to ______．

A．the minimum B．to little amount C．the maximum D．to great amount 41．The Chief Officer ______ told the stevedores to stow the cargo lot by lot

A．plainly B．playfully C．absolutely D．completely 42．My ship is ______No. 5 berth for loading．

A．onto the wharf B．moved astern C．into the dock D．moored alongside 43．The necessity of the segregation of cargoes is determined by ______．

A．experience from practice B．various types of cargoes C．different types of ships D．personal abilities

44．The agent promised to keep me ______ of how our business was going on.

A．to be informed B．informed C．on informing D．informing 45．Figure of cargo short-landed in ______．

A．dispute B．argue C．debate D．discuss 46．As a general rule, tally clocks should make their tallying ______．

A．in warehouses B．on deck C．ashore D．in the tallyroom 47．Isobars on a synoptic chart are useful in predicting ______．

A．temperature B．dew point C．wind velocity D．relative humidity 48．BASHI: E TO SE 9-10. 500M IN HVY SQUALLY SHWRS AND TS. SEA 8-9M. SWELL SE 6-7M. From the above forecast, the wind in Beaufort Scale will be ______．

A．STRONG GALE TO STORM B．GALE TO STRONG GALE

C．NEAR GALE TO GALE D．STRONG BREEZE TO NEAR GALE 49．Good weather is usually associated with a region of ______．

A．low barometric pressure B．high barometric pressure C．falling barometric pressure D．pumping barometric pressure 50．A sea breeze is a wind ______． A．that blows towards the sea at night B．that blows towards an island during the day C．caused by cold air descending a coastal incline D．caused by the distant approach of a hurricane 51．A boundary between two air masses is a(n) ______ ．

A．lapse rate B．isobar C．front D．continent 52．A partial deck in a hold is called a(n) ______ ．

A．weather deck B．orlop deck C．shelter deck D．main deck 53．For an upright vessel, draft is the vertical distance between the keel and the ______．

A．waterline B．freeboard deck C．plimsoll mark D．amidships section 54．Bulkheads forming part of the tanks on a ship are stiffened to withstand ______．

A．deck loads from above B．dynamic forces while afloat C．hydrostatic pressure D．over pressurization 55．How would the exhaust of a properly operating diesel engine appear?

A．Light blue haze B．Light brown haze C．Light gray haze D．Perfectly haze 56．On an anchor windlass, the wheel over which the anchor chain passes is called a ______．

A．brake compressor wheel B．devil‘s claw C．wildcat D．winchhead

57．The primary reason for placing covers over storage batteries is to ______．

A．prevent the accumulation of explosive gases B．protect the hull from leaking electrolyte

C．prevent movement of the battery in rough waters D．protect against accidental shoring across terminals 58．What course should be fed in to a stabilized radar picture?

A．Compass course B．Gyro course C．True course D．Course made good 59．When hitting a solid object such as a ship or an airplane, the radar waves are reflected back

______．they came

A．in the way B．the way C．by the way D．through the way 60．The correct method of switching off a marine radar is to turn power switch to ______ position first, then to ______ position．

A．off / standby B．standby / off C．standby /close D．close / standby 61．My gyro-compass ______ is two degrees east．

A．trouble B．error C．wrong D．mistake 62．Which one of the followings is incorrect about magnetic compass?

A．The magnetic compass is compulsory on any vessel B．The magnetic compass is prone to error

C．The magnetic compass is always placed inside steel constructions

D．The magnetic compass needs to be calibrated to compensate for local magnetic distortion 63．Magnetic variation changes with a change in ______．

A．the vessel‘s heading B．sea conditions C．seasons D．the vessel‘s position

．Automatic identification systems (AIS) are expected to broadcast all of the following information EXCEPT ______．

A．Port of origin B．Name of vessel C．Course and speed over ground D．Draft of vessel 65．When own ships position input to ECDIS wrong, what is resultl?

A．Nothing

B．ECDIS will give warning

C．ECDIS will automatically be switched off

D．Positions, range and bearings taken on the ECDIS will be wrong 66．What is the main purpose of DGPS?

A．To improve positioning accuracy B．To decrease positioning accuracy

C．To reduce operational cost D．To simplify operation process 67．The ‗urgent‘ priority should be used for messages ______．

A．concerning the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) B．detailing important navigational warnings

C．containing information concerning the safety of a mobile unit or person D．concerning on-scene communications

68．Which statement concerning locating signals in the GMDSS is FALSE?

A．Locating signals are transmitted by survival craft VHF transceivers B．Locating signals are transmitted by SARTs

C．Locating signals are intended to facilitate the finding of a distressed vessel or its survivors D．Locating signals are not transmitted by autoalarm generators

69．What is the meaning of the word ―RODGER‖ when used in radio communication

A．please repeat your message B．Not readable

C．Correct D．I have received your transmission satisfactorily 70．Our ship is slow in going astern, please ______．

A．be careful B．be kind enough C．be nice D．be looked after 71．I have steerage way. It is said that ______ ．

A．I am underway B．I am out of control

C．I am not making way through the water

D．I have the amount of movement forward which the ship needs to be steered properly 72．What is a CORRECT reply to a pilot‘s request, ―How‘s your heading‖?

A．Steady B．Eased to 10° rudder C．Checked D．Passing 50° 73．A bollard is found on the ______．

A．beach B．deck C．pier D．towed vessel

74．In order to help protect a natural fiber rope from rotting, the line must be ______．

A．dried, and stowed in a place with adequate ventilation B．stowed in a hot, moist compartment C．stowed on deck at all times D．stowed in any compartment

75．In order to detect rot in manila lines, you should ______．

A．feel the surface of the line for broken fibers

B．measure the reduction in circumference of the line C．observe any mildew on the outer surface

D．open the strands and examine the inner fibers

76．A long pole with a hook at one end, used to reach for lines, is known as a ______．

A．pike pole B．jack staff C．line rod D．hooker 77．Paints and solvent on a vessel should be ______．

A．stored safely at the work site until work is completed B．returned to the paint locker after each use

C．covered at all times to protect from ignition sources D．stored in a suitable gear locker

78．You are standing the wheelwatch when you hear the cry, ‗Man overboard starboard side‘. You should instinctively ______．

A．give full right rudder B．give full left udder

C．put the rudder amidships D．throw a life ring to mark the spot

79．A situation ha occurred where is becomes necessary for you to be towed. What action should be

taken to prevent your vessel from yawing? ______．

A．Shift weight to the bow B．Shift weight to the center of the boat C．Shift weight to stern D．Throw excess weight overboard 80．Lifejackets should be stowed in ______．

A．the forepeaks B．the pumproom

C．readily accessible spaces D．locked watertight containers 81．After using a CO2 portable extinguisher, it should be ______．

A．put back in service if some CO2 remains B．hydrostatically tested C．retagged D．recharged

82．Fire axes required on ship must be stored in the enclosure for fire houses with the location marked ―______‖．

A．Fire Axe location B．Hose Station No.

C．Fire Station No. D．Firefighting Equipment

83．If help has not arrived in 10-12 hours after you abandon a vessel in a survival craft, you should ______．

A．go in one direction until the fuel runs out B．plot a course for the nearest land

C．take a vote on which direction you should go D．shut down the engine(s) and set the sea anchor

84．Making water rapidly in all holds, all passengers and crew were order on deck ______ and all boats were lowered to rail．

A．in life jackets B．with life jackets C．with life jackets on D．putting on life jackets 85．If the engine of a survival craft does not start, check to see ______ ．

A．that the fuel valve is open B．if the air supply system is open C．if the water sprinkler system is open D．if the limit switch is on

86．Which of the following may be used in cleaning up an oil spill without the permission of

governmental authorities? A．Straw and Skimmer only B．Skimmers and Chemical dispersants only C．Straw and Chemical dispersants only D．Straw, Skimmers and Chemical dispersants 87．A crew member suffering from hypothermia should be given ______．

A．a small dose of alcohol B．treatment for shock C．a large meal D．a brisk rub down 88．When a rescuer finds an electrical burn victim in the vicinity of live electrical equipment or wiring, his first step is to ______．

A．flush water over any burned area of the patient B．apply ointment to the burned areas on the patient C．get assistance to shut down electrical power in the area

D．remove the patient from the vicinity of the live electrical equipment or wiring

二. 关联题 (每组关联题题干下有4个小题, 每小题4个选项) 第一组:

EGC Message ---- MET Navarea Warning or MET Forecast ---- Message Sequence No : 00103 LES : KDDI Priority :Urgent

Size : 969characters

Receive Date & Time : 07-09-18 06:56(UTC) PAN PAN

THIS TROPICAL CYCLONE WARING IS ISSUED FOR THE NORTH OF EQUATOR OF METAREA XI (FOR) WARNING 180600

WARNING WALID 190600

WARNING IS UPDATED EVERY 6 HOURS TYPHOON WARNING

TYPHOON 0712 WIPHA (0712) 930 HPA

AT 25.7N 122.6E NORTHWEST OF ISHIGAKIJIMA MOVING NORTHWEST 16 KNOTS POSITION GOOD

MAX WINDS 100 KNOTS NEAR CENTER

RADIUS OF OVER 50 KNOT WINDS 90 MILES

RADIUS OF OVER 30 KNOT WINDS 260 MILES NORTHEAST SEMICIRCLE AND 180 MILES ELSEWHERE

FORECAST POSITION FOR 181800UTC AT 27.2N 120.8E WITH 60 MILES RADIUS OF 70 PERCENT PROBABILITY CIRCLE

950 HPA, M,AX WIND 85 KNOTS NEAR CENTER

FORECAST POSITION FOR 190600UTC AT 29.7N 119.6E WITH 90 MILES RADIUS OF 70 985 HPA, MAX WINDS 50 KNOTS EXTENDED OUTLOOK

FORECAST POSITION FOR 200600UTC AT 37.0N 121.9E WITH 170 MILES READIUS OF 70 PERCENT PROBABILITY CIRCLE 1000 HPA, MAX WINDS 35 KNOTS BECOMING EXTRATROPICAI. LOW JAPAN METEOROLOGICAL AGENCY . Where is the message sent from?

A. Japan B. Singapore C. Taiwan D. New Zealand 90. What is the priority of the message?

A. Routine B. Securite C. Urgency D. Distress 91. The warning was issued at 180600 and will first updated at _______.

A. 190600 B. 181256 C. 180656 D.181200 92. Which of the following statements is true according to the warning?

A. 950 HPA located at 25.7N 122.6E, its maximum winds near centre reach 85 knots, and radius of over 30 knot winds 260 miles northeast semicircle

B. 930 HPA located at 25.7N 122.6E, its maximum winds near centre reach 100 knots, and radius of over 30 knot winds 260 miles northeast semicircle

C. 950 HPA located at 29.7N 119.6E, its maximum winds near centre reach 85 knots, and radius of over 30 knot winds 260 miles northeast semicircle

D. 930 HPA located at 29.7N 119.6E, its maximum winds near centre reach 100 knots, and radius

of over 30 knot winds 260 miles northeast semicircle

第二组

Of various types of navigation, dead reckoning alone is always available in some form. In an emergency it is of more than average importance. With electronic systems out of service, you should keep a close check on speed, direction and distance made good; carefully evaluate the effects of wind and current; then determine your position by dead reckoning. Long voyages with accurate landfalls have been successfully completed by this method alone. This is not meant to minimize the importance of other methods of determining position. However, dead reckoning positions may be more accurate than those determined by other methods. If the means of determining direction and distance are accurate, it may be best to adjust the dead reckoning only after a confirmed fix. 93. Landfall means ______.

A. a dead reckoning position B. a confirmed fix

C. electronic systems out of service D. that land is first sighted from a long voyage 94. The dead reckoning ______.

A. will minimize the importance of other methods of determining position B. is likely to become more accurate in an emergency C. will cause electronic systems to fail D. is easier than other Types of navigation 95. The dead reckoning position is ______.

A. less accurate than a confirmed fix in most cases

B. more accurate than those determined by electronic systems C. always very accurate

D. of more than average importance to determine the speed, direction and distance made good 96 In the author‘s opinion, dead reckoning position has all of the following characters except ______.

A. it should only be adjusted after a confirmed fix B. it is very important in emergency

C. it is more accurate than those determined by other methods

D. in a long voyage, only dead reckoning will successfully make you arrive at your destination

期数：45 试卷代号：903

题号--答案 1--D 6--B 11--D 16--C 21--A 26--C 31--A 36--B 41--A 46--B 51—C 56--C 61--B 66--A 71--D 76--A 81--D 86--A 91--D 96--D 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

题号--答案 2--D 7--C 12--D 17--C 22--B 27--D 32--D 37--D 42--D 47--C 52--B 57--D 62--C 67--C 72--A 77--B 82--C 87--A 92--B 题号--答案 3--D 8--D 13--C 18--B 23--C 28--D 33--C 38--A 43--B 48--A 53--A 58--C 63--D 68--A 73--C 78-A 83--D 88--C 93--A 题号--答案 4--D 9--C 14--D 19—D 24--D 29--C 34--D 39--A 44--B 49--B 54--A 59--D --A 69--D 74--A 79--C 84--C --A 94--B 题号--答案 5--B 10--D 15--B 20--D 25--A 30--C 35--D 40--A 45--A 50--B 55--D 60--B 65-D 70--A 75--D 80--C 85--A 90--C 95--D 有关旋转潮流方向和速度的资料能够在潮流表（潮汐流动图表）里被找到 海岸的灯标表应该准确地对照航海通告，需即时修正 据报灯船被损坏

一个浮标印在海图上倾向于东北方向，这表示没有什么特殊的航海意义（TM真够无聊） 什么时候需要做航行计划？在航行以前 海图修改的日期应该标注在左下角

引航图上的绿色箭头表示一般的洋流流向 英版航海通告被发表为了英版海图的改正

由于这个位置的调查数据太陈旧，这图上的雷康数量不能被信赖 纠正航海日志中的错误的适合方法是在记录上划线，重写并签署 显然，货物是被你方的工人所损坏

{所述（上面提到的）}的事故是由你船所导致的

由于泵辅没有被关闭当油太满而偶然溢出货舱定义为溢漏

有关于打开和关闭一个没有配备遥控操纵和警报和完整水密设备，这个船壳指示器运转或没有在运转的所有事实都必须记录进日志中

15. 我们每三个月测试防火救生艇的喷水防火系统，连同弃船训练

16. 船舶必须配备有足够的合格驾驶员和船员 17. 船籍港指的是该船注册的港口

18. 根据SOLAS公约，气胀式救生筏内部照明电源的电池通过仅在必要时开启可以被维持

使用更长一段时间

19. 当在大洋中航行时，任何垃圾的处理或排泄记录都必须在每次垃圾的处理时进行记录 20. 远洋船舶需要一个污染管理计划，这个计划必须记录收集和排放垃圾的过程 21. 在一个受潮汐影响的江河，在没有拖轮协助下靠泊的最佳时间是在平潮时 22. 通常，不要用全套绳饶鼓轮超过3-4 圈 23. （奶奶的 又没有题目）

24. 港口机构要求船长在抛锚以后报告锚泊地点的方位‗ 25. 瞭望时报告物标用相对方位

26. 吹越拖带船的视风速能够通过风速仪被测量 27. 由三个闪光组成的灯光信号意思是我正在倒车

28. 规则规定船舶可能背离规则的要求当有必要避免紧迫危险时 29. 对于机动船来说，帆船是直航船除了当它们是追越船外

30. 假如有足够的水域，仅凭转向可能是避免紧迫局面的最有效的措施 31. 目的旨在减少碰撞事故的航线设计制度被称为分道通航制 32. 助航灯标的周期指的是灯光完成一个循环所需要的时间 33. 真航向指的是真北向和船艏向之间的夹角

34. （无风无流）推算船位标绘忽略表层海流的影响 35. 平均高潮是所有高潮潮高的平均值 36. 潮汐是垂直方向上水的运动

37. 往船的前部转移重量后，漂心处的吃水将保持不变 38. 不稳定的平衡存在于小倾角下，重心在稳心之上 39. 船舶减少液体自由表面减少横摇周期 40. 亏舱必须被减少到最小

41. 大副清楚地告诉工人一批一批地装载货物 42. 我船（被）系泊于第五号泊位装货

43. 货物隔离的必要性取决于货物的不同类型 44. 代理承诺坚持让我获悉我们业务进行的情况 45. 货物的数字有争议

46. 按照一般的规定，理货员应该在甲板上填写他们的理货记录 47. 等压线在气象图上在预报风速时很有用\\

48. Bashi：东到东南风9到10级。在大暴雨和TS时能见度500米。浪高8到9米。涌东南

向6到7级。从以上的预报中，在Beaufort风力表中将是烈风（九级风）到暴风 49. 好天气通常伴随着高压系统 50. 海风是一种在白天吹向岛屿的风 51. 两个气团的边界是锋

52. 在舱内的部分甲板被称为最下层甲板

53. 对于一艘正浮的船，吃水是自龙骨到水线的垂直距离 54. 油轮舱壁的结构部分是坚硬的用来承受静水压力

55. 一台正常运转的柴油机出现什么样的排气？完美的清晰 56. 在起锚机上，锚链越过并通过它的轮子被称为持链轮

57. 对于覆盖在电表面的一层，最重要的作用是防止其发生事故性的短路

58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. . 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86. 87. 88.

什么航向被输入稳定雷达图象？真航向

当雷达波遇到硬质物体如船舶或飞机时，雷达波将沿者发射来的路径反射回去 我船陀螺罗经误差两度东 我的电罗经误差偏东两度

关于磁罗经下面哪项是不正确的？磁罗经总是放在刚性结构里面 磁差随着船舶位置的改变而改变

自动识别系统预计广播下列信息除了：始发港

当把拥有的船位错误输入电子海图显示与信息系统，结果会怎么样？显示在电子海图显示与信息系统上的船位，航程，方位将错误 差分GPS 的主要目的是什么？改良定位精度

―紧急‖优先权应用于包含涉及移动单元或人员安全的信息

下列哪项有关GMDSS的位置信号说法错误的是：位置信息由救生筏上的VHF接收机来发送

当使用无线电通信的时候单词―明白了‖是什么意思？我已经满意的收到了你的传送 我船在慢速倒车，请小心

舵效速度指的是：我船改变操纵所需的向前移动 回复引航员的正确口令：把定 系船桩被设立在码头上

为了防止天然纤维绳腐烂，缆绳必须干燥并存放于通风的地方 为了检测马尼拉绳的腐烂，你应掰开绳股并检查里面的纤维 吊钩上一根长杆，用于连接绳索的叫：杆钩 船上的油漆和溶剂应在每次使用后放回油漆间

你正在操舵时当你听见有人喊：有人右舷落水 你应该本能地操右满舵 发生一种情形致使你船有被拖带的需要。你应采取什么措施以防止艏摇？移动重量到船艉

救生衣应该存放在随时可用的地方

CO2便携式灭火器使用后，应被重新充装

MODU轮所需的太平斧必须放在被标记编为号数的消防站的消防水龙带箱内 假如你弃船进入救生艇后10~12小时内没有救助到达，你将关闭机器并抛海锚 所有货舱迅速进水，所有旅客和船员穿好救生衣到甲板上并且所有救生艇下降到栏杆边 如果救生筏没有起动，应该查看燃油阀是否打开

以下哪些东西在没有当局的许可下能够被用于清除泄漏的油污染？仅草和撇油容器

遭受体温降低的船员应给予防休克处理

如果救援人员发现一个被触电的受伤人员，则应该首先关闭这区域的电源

2007年第3期海船船员适任证书全国统考试题（总第44期）

科目：航海英语 试卷代号：903 适用对象：无限航区、近洋航区二/三副

(本试卷卷面总分100分，及格分为70分，考试时间100分钟)

答题说明：请选择一个最合适的答案，并将该答案按答题卡要求，在相应位置上用2B铅笔涂黑。第1题至68题，每题1分，第69题至76题，每题1.5分，第77题至81题每题4分．

一．单项选择题

1. Several shoals ____ reported to exist in the area south-west of the Brothers.

A. have

B. have been

C. has

D. has been

2. The lighthouse if ____ at night may be in trouble. A. invisible

B. it is invisible

C. isn‘t visible

D. visible

3. What is the use of the books of admiralty list of lights and fog signals? Their use is to ____. A. mention signal stations and ice, storm, traffic and port signals B. give the international numbers of lights C. give the correction of the lights and fog signals D. give the information on the lights and fog signals

4. Attention is ____ the advice on the use of charts in the Mariner‘s Handbook Chapter 3, Section 1. A. fixed to

B. needed for

C. pushed to

D. drawn to

5. Distance along a track line is measured on a Mercator chart by using the ____. A. latitude scale near the middle of the track line B. longitude scale near the middle of the track line C. latitude scale at the mid-latitude of the chart D. latitude or longitude scale at the middle of the scale 6. Isogonic lines are lines on a chart indicating ____. A. points of equal variation C. the magnetic latitude

B. points of zero variation D. magnetic dip

7. Low at 34N 135E esly slwly intst NC. This description is most likely to be under the heading of ____. A. GL WNG

B. GEN SYN

C. STM WNG

D. T Y WNG

8. It is dangerous for vessels without the use of radar ____ the estuary. A. to get

B. to approach

C. to proceed

D. to close

9. No navigational aids are shown and the chart is not kept corrected for alterations in depths inside

the pecked lines. For more detailed information, the larger scale charts must be ____. A. referred to B. appreciated

C. met with

D. concerned

10. Orders of the master to the officers of the watch which he must comply with are ____. A. night orders B. standing orders

C. commands by master D. requirements by master

11. ____ is a full nautical record of a ship‘s voyage, written up at the end of each watch by the officer

of the watch.

A. Sea protest B. Deck book

C. Accident report D. Seaman‘s book

12. A wise captain gives clear direction in his ____ for the officers on watch to call him if in any

doubt whatsoever. A. deck logbook

B. master‘s note C. bell book

D. master‘s standing orders

13. The master should ____ necessary precautions to prevent accidents or damage.

A. do

B. take

C. set

D. have

14. Mooring ____ are placed on both banks of the Suez Canal about 200m apart. A. bollards

B. ballasts

C. bands

D. benefits

15. Port of registry refers to the port where ____. A. the ship has been named C. the ship has been signed

B. the ship has been built D. the ship has been registered

16. Any person maintaining a listening watch on a bridge to bridge radio-telephone must be able to ____. A. speak English B. repair the unit 17. Where shall the key to CO2 room be kept?

A. In master‘s cabin

B. In third officer‘s cabin

C. speak Spanish

D. send Morse code

C. In a break-glass-type enclosure conspicuously located adjacent to the room D. In a locked locker conspicuously located adjacent to the room

18. Instruction on how to conduct search and rescue are given in the _____ which is primarily

designed for use by merchant ship. A. MARPOL

B. IRPCS

C. SOLAS

D. MERSAR

19. A vessel emitting harmful substances into the air or spilling oil into the sea is a ____.

A. polluter B. emitter

C. spiller

D. oilier

20. The pilotage-quarantine anchorage, ____ between Damen Island and Qingshan Island, is defined

by the lines ____ the given points. A. situated / connected C. situating / connected

B. situated / connecting D. situating / connecting

21. The last shot of an anchor cable is usually painted ____.

A. white

B. international orange C. yellow

D. red

22. When anchoring a vessel, it is best to release the anchor when _______.

A. going full astern B. going full ahead C. going slow astern D. dead in the water

23. It is sometimes necessary to moor bow and stern to two mooring buoys in order to ____. A. avoid any swing in a restricted space C. prevent to touch with other vessels

B. shelter the ship from strong winds D. make a convenience of cargo discharging

24. Reducing the liquid free surface in a vessel reduces the _____.

A. roll period B. metacentric height

C. waterplane area D. vessel‘s draft

25. When are you allowed to throw plastic garbage overboard?

A. Being more than 25 miles from short B. Only at night when it‘s dark C. Being more than 6 miles from shore D. Never

26. A twin-screw ship going ahead on the starboard screw only tends to move ____. B(2269) A. in a straight line B. to port

C. from side to side

D. to starboard

27. When underway in a channel, you should keep to ____. B(0059) A. the middle of the channel

B. the starboard side of the channel

D. the side of the channel with the widest turns

C. the port side of the channel

28. The rules state that vessels may depart from the requirements of the rules when ____. D(0162) A. there are no other vessels around C. the master enters it the ship‘s log

B. operating in a narrow channel D. necessary to avoid immediate danger

29. Your ship is steaming at night with the gyro pilot engaged. You notice that the vessel‘s course is

slowly changing to the right. Which action should you take first? ____. B(1055) A. Notify the engine room of the steering malfunction C. Call the master

B. Change to hand steering

D. Send the quartermaster to the emergency steering station

30. A vessel engaged in replenishment or transferring persons，provisions or cargo while under way

can be regarded as ______.

A. a vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver

B. a vessel engaged in laying，serving or picking up a navigation mark，submarine cable or pipeline． C. a vessel not under command

D. a power-driven vessel．

31. A line on the Earth B the equator is a ____.

A. gnomonic curve B. small circle

C. meridian D. great circle

32. The positions and characteristics of lights and buoys shown within the port area are ____. A. untrue

B. impossible

C. suspectful D. unimportant

33. When latitude and longitude are used, these shall be expressed ____ (and decimals of a minute if

necessary), north or south of the equator and east or west of Greenwich.

A. fathoms and meters B. miles and kilometers C. arc and degrees D. in degrees and minutes 34. The navigational term set of current means ____. A. velocity of current in knots C. estimated current

B. direction from which the current flows D. direction toward which the current flows

35. When there are small differences between the heights of two successive high tides or two

successive low tides, the tides are called ______. A. diurnal

B. semi-diurnal C. solar

D. mixed

36. The sprinkler system of a survival craft is used to ______.

A. cool the craft in a fire

B. cool the engine

D. spray personnel during a fire

C. spray oil on the sea to calm it

37. Keeping the draft at or below the load line mark will insure that the vessel has adequate ____.

A. ballast

B. reserve buoyancy

C. displacement D. rolling periods

38. The terminal staff tallies the cargo mainly before the ship‘s ____________.

A. loading B. leaving

C. arriving

D. sailing

39. The tropical cyclone at 15.8N,132.4E has yesterday afternoon ____ into a tropical storm with

max winds 70 knots near center. A. upgraded B. decreased

C. become

D. changed

40. A hurricane moving northeast out of the gulf passes west of your position. You could expect all

of the following except ____. A. higher than normal swells

B. high winds

C. winds veering from south, through west, to northwest D. light showers

41. Generally speaking, with ____ the weather becomes cloudy or overcast with strong winds.

A. high pressures B. low pressures

C. weak pressures D. strong pressures

42. Upon underwater ____ by divers, there are no apparent ____ on the bottom plates of the said vessel.

A. detection, defects

B. detection, defects C. defects, detection D. defects, detection

43. Molded depth is measured from the ____. A. inside of the shell

B. outside of the shell D. top of the garboard stake

C. top of the center vertical keel

44. The portable radio apparatus means ____. A. the radio apparatus fitted on the portside B. the radio with a portable equipment C. the radio equipment which is easily movable D. the portable radio with some apparatuses

45. Cleaning, painting and repairing work is known as ____________

A. Maintenance work B. Lashing work C. Tallying work 46. SWEEP INT on radar panel is the abbreviation of ____.

A. sweep introduction B. sweep interest C. sweep intention

D. sweep intensity

D. Overtime work

47. The abbreviation PPI in the Sperry collision avoidance system means ___.

A. plan position indicator

B. plain position indicator D. policy proof of interest

C. plane position indication

48. Deviation is the angle between the ____.

A. true meridian and the axis of the compass card B. true meridian and the magnetic meridian

C. magnetic meridian and the axis of the compass card D. axis of the compass card and the degaussing meridian 49. The best way to test the INMARSAT-C terminal is to ________.

A. send a message to a shore terminal and wait for confirmation

B. compose and send a brief message to your own INMARSAT-C terminal C. send a message to another terminal

D. see if the send light flashes, then proper operation has been confirmed. 50. Would you please ___ on the radar.

A. switch

B. to switch

C. switched

D. will switch

51. A Doppler log in the bottom return mode indicates the ____.

A. velocity of the current B. bottom characteristics C. depth of the water D. speed over the ground 52. Where should the GMDSS Radio Log be kept on board ship?

A. In the Captain‘s Office

B. In the sea cabin.

C. At the GMDSS operating position D. Anywhere on board the vessel 53. Which equipment is the primary source of generating a locating signal?

A．DSC only B．DSC and EPIRB C．SART and DSC D．EPIRB and SART

54. When it is advisable to remain on VHF channel 14 you should say ____.

A. stand by on VHF channel 14

B. come to VHF channel 14

C. VHF channel 14 is the best place for you to stay by D. remain in channel 14 and not change

55. International distress signal in VHF calling for help is ____.

A. Help, Help, Help C. Save, Save, Save

B. Mayday, Mayday, Mayday

D. Rescue, Rescue, Rescue

56. A vessel‘s quarter is that section which is ____. A. abeam

B. dead astern C. just aft of the bow D. on either side of the stern

57. What may affect the accuracy of sounding with echo sounder?

A. Sea bottom

B. Ship‘s speed

C. Speed of current

D. Water temperature and density

58. In order to help protect a natural fiber rope from rotting, the line must be ____. A. dried, and stowed in a place with adequate ventilation B. stowed in a hot, moist compartment C. stowed on deck at all times

D. stowed in any compartment

59. Your vessel is approaching a bend. You hear a prolonged. blast from around. the bend. You

should._____. A. back your engine

B. stop your engine and. drift

D. sound. the danger signal

C. answer with one prolonged. blast

60. When steering by autopilot, how often should manual steering be checked?

A. Every day B. When time allows C. At least once a watch D. No checking is necessary

61. You receive word that a person has fallen overboard from the starboard side. You should first ____. A. notify the master

B. put the wheel hard right

C. put the engines full astern D. sound the man overboard alarm 62. A fire started by spontaneous combustion can be expected in which condition?

A. paints, varnish or other liquid flammables are stowed in a dry stores locker B. inert cargoes such as pig iron are loaded in a wet condition C. oily rags are stowed in a metal pail

D. clean mattress are stored in contact with an electric light bulb

63. A round through the vessel carried out by a crewmember of the watch at certain intervals so that

an outbreak of fire may be promptly detected defines ____. A. fire patrol B. fire control

C. smoke detection D. fire drill

. A fire is discovered in the bow of your vessel while making way. The wind is from ahead at 35

knots. You should ______. A. remain on course and hold speed

B. remain on course but slack the speed

C. change course to put the wind on either beam and increase speed D. change course and put the stern to the wind 65. What type of radar can activate a Racon?

A. X-band radar

B. S-band

C. C-band radar

D. No radar can

66. If help has not arrived in 10-12 hours after you abandon a vessel in a survival craft, you should_____.

A. go in one direction until the fuel runs out B. plot a course for the nearest land. C. take a vote on which direction you should go

D. shut down the engine(s) and set the sea anchor

67. A continual worsening of the list or trim of any floating ship indicates ______.

A. negative GM B. progressive flooding C. structural failure D. an immediate need to counterflood 68. Deficient oxygen content inside a chain locker can be detected with ____. A. litmus paper

B. a combustible gas indicator D. an oxygen indicator

C. an oxygen breathing apparatus 二．关联题 第一组：

Admiralty Standard Navigational Charts (SNC) are produced in a range of scales for safe ocean navigation covering passage planning, harbour and nautical hazards, anchorages, coasts and off shore navigation. To ensure safe navigation, it is recommended that mariners always use the largest scale chart available. In particularly busy seaways, the Admiralty SNC series is supplemented by Mariners Routeing Guides which advise on routes planning and all necessary regulations appropriate to the area of navigation. Admiralty Notes to Mariners , weekly editions contain information which enables the mariners to keep his charts and books up to date for the latest reports received 69. To ensure safe navigation the mariners should always use ___________

A. ocean navigation chart

B. coastal and off-shore navigation chart D. the largest scale chart available

C. Admiralty Standard Navigational Chart

70. An Admiralty SNC is kept up to date by ___________

A. Admiralty Notes to Mariners C. routes planning

B. Mariners Routeing Guides D. all necessary regulations

71. All Admiralty Standard Navigational Charts are produced_________.

A. in a standard scale

B. in different scales

C. in two scales, of which one is larger than the other D. in largest scales which are available for safe ocean navigation 72. It is inferred that__ _______

A. Admiralty Notes to Mariners are published only when latest reports are received B. coasts and off shore navigation is not covered by ocean navigation

C. in particularly busy seaways, the only use of Admiralty SNC series is not enough D. Mariners Routeing Guides shall be used to keep charts and books up-to-date 第二组：

The bulker‘s officer of the watch (OOW) had detected, both visually and by radar, the presence of a group of flashing boats on his starboard bow at a distance of at least ten nautical miles. These boats were crossing ahead, but the OOW quickly established that there was a risk of collision with at least one of the group.

There was ample sea room to starboard to make a bold alteration of course, which would have left all of the fishing boats well clear to port. However, the OOW instead made only a small alteration of course to starboard which gave a closest point of approach to the nearest fishing vessel of only half a nautical mile. Unfortunately, the developing close quarters‘ situation was not monitored properly after an inadequate watch handover on the bulk carrier. Despite the relieving OOW‘s last-minute hard-a-starboard manoeuvre, the bulk carrier struck the fishing vessel, causing it to capsize and quickly sink.

73.The accident arose out of ____________.

A. limited sea room

B. improper lookout

C. certain mechanical failure D. some negligence in navigation

74. These boats were crossing ahead, but the OOW quickly established that there was a risk of

collision with at least one of the group.

75. After the OOW made a small alteration of course to starboard, the two ships were in a ______.

A. heading-on situation B. crossing situation C. overtaking situation D. dangerous situation 76. The responsibility of the accident should be on the part of ___________.

A. the bulk ship

B. the relieved OOW

C. the fishing boat in collision with the bulk ship

D. The relieving OOW‘s taking last-minute hard-a-starboard manoeuvre 三．中译英（共5题，请将答案写在答题纸上） 77． 驾驶台的舵角指示与舵机的实际舵角相一致

78．驾驶员应熟悉主操舵系统和应急操舵系统之间的转换 79．（航海日志）右船艏破损进水，开始压载所有尾部双层底未满水舱。 80．（航海日志）偏南风9级，涌浪5级，气压急剧降至900帕。 81．（航海日志）将舱内和甲板上所有物品系固，紧固吊杆及索具后封舱。

参

题号--答案 1-- B 6--A 11--B 16--A 21-D 26--B 31--B 36--A 41--B 46--D 51--D 56--D 61--B 66--D 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

题号--答案 2--A 7--B 12-- D 17--C 22--C 27--B 32--A 37--B 42--A 47--A 52--C 57--A 62--C 67--B 题号--答案 3--D 8--B 13--B 18--D 23--A 28--D 33--D 38--A 43--A 48- C 53--D 58--A 63--A 68--D 题号--答案 4--D 9--A 14--A 19--A 24--B 29--B 34--D 39--A 44--C 49--B 54--A 59--C --D 题号--答案 5--A 10--B 15--D 20--B 25--D 30--A 35--B 40--D 45--A 50--A 55--B 60--C 65--B 69--72DABC 73—76DCBA 在Brothers的西南区域存在有几个浅滩 夜间灯塔，则可能是出故障了 使用英版灯标雾号表做什么？使用它们

海员手册关于海图的使用的一些建议 Mercator海图上沿着航线的距离测量是使用 等磁差线是海图上相同磁差的点联成的线

34N 135E处的低压东南缓慢移动，强度不变。这个描述很可能在标题为的下面

船舶不使用雷达港湾是危险的

没有助航设施被呈现且海图点虚线内的水深更改没有被改正。为有更详细的信息，必须

大比例尺海图

10. 船长给值班驾驶员的命令必须符合 11. 是船舶航次的完全记录，由值班驾驶员在每班结束时填写 12. 一种船长给值班驾驶员明确指导的方式在里以便驾驶员无论在任何时

候有怀疑时叫他 13. 船长应必要的预防措施防止事故或损失 14. Suez运河两岸的之间的距离大约为200米 15. 船籍港指的是该船注册的港口

16. 保持守听驾驶台的驾驶台对驾驶台无线电话的人员必须能够 17. 二氧化碳室的钥匙放在哪里？位于临近房间的―击碎玻璃‖面卡的惹人注意的的墙壁上 18. 如何指挥搜索和救助的说明在最早被用于商船的上给出 19. 散发危害物质到大气中或泄露油到海里的船舶是污染者

20. 位于Damen岛和Qingshan岛之间的引水检疫锚地由给出的点的连线确定 21. 最后一节锚链通常油漆成 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49.

为了避免船舶在受限的水域偏荡有时有必要船首尾都系浮筒 船舶减少液体自由表面减少

什么时候允许你向船外扔塑料垃圾？什么时候都不行 一双车船仅用右舷车前进，趋向运动 当在航道中航行时，你应保持在 规则规定船舶可能背离规则的要求当时 你船使用自动舵夜航。你注意到船的航向缓慢向右变化。你首先应采取什么动作？

在航中从事补给或转运人员，供应品或货物的船舶可以被认为是 地球上平行于赤道的线叫

港口区域内指示的灯标和浮筒的位置和特性不正确 当使用经纬度时，这些应被表达为（并小数点到分必要时），赤道的南北，格林威治的东西

航海中的流向意思是指

当两个连续的高潮潮高或两个连续的低潮潮高之间存在很小的差异，这潮水叫做半日潮 封闭式救生艇的喷淋系统用于冷却火焰中的艇身 保持吃水在或在载重线以下将确保船舶具有适当的 码头理货人员主要是在装船前理货

在15.8N, 132.4E处的热带气旋已于昨天下午为近中心风速70节的热带风暴 飓风往东北方向向海湾外移动在你的西边通过。你能够预期以下所有情形除外

一般来说，常伴随阴云大风天气 通过潜水水下，上述船舶的船底板没有存在明显的 型深自船量起 便携式无线电设备意思是 清洁，油漆和修理工作叫做维修工作 SWEEP INT在雷达面板上是的缩写 缩写词PPI在Sperry避碰系统中的意思是 自差是之间的角

50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. . 65. 66. 67. 68.

你愿意雷达吗

多普勒测速仪工作在绝对示速工况模式显示

当VHF可以保持在14频道时，你应说 国际遇险信号在VHF上呼救是 船尾舷是指。

什么会影响回声探测仪的精度？水的温度和密度 为了防止天然纤维绳腐烂，缆绳必须 你船正在接近一个湾头。在湾头附近你听到一长声。你应 当操自动舵的时候，操舵装置多久被检查一次？每班至少一次 你收到消息，一人自右舷落水。你首先应 哪种环境可能发生源于自燃的火灾？ 在确定的间隔由值班船员完成围绕全船以便对火灾的爆发能够被适当的探测定义为

船舶在航行中发现船首火灾。风来自正船首，速度35节，你应改变航向并使船尾迎风 什么类型的雷达能激活雷达信标？X 波段的雷达

假如你弃船进入救生艇后10~12小时内没有救助到达，你将 连续恶化的横倾或纵倾表明船舶可能 锚链舱内的氧气不足能够被检测到

中华人民共和国海事局

2007年第2期海船船员适任证书全国统考试题（总第43期）

科目：航海英语 试卷代号：903

适用对象：无限航区，近洋航区船舶二、三副

（本试卷卷面总分100分，及格分数70分，考试时间100分钟）

答题说明：请选择一个最合适的答案，并将该答案按答题卡要求，在相应位置上用2B铅笔涂黑。第1题至68题，每题1分，第69题至76题，每题1.5分，第77题至81题每题4分。

一、单项选择题

1. From ______ the mariner can know the data of tide．

A. the Sea Pilot B. the Cargo Plan C. the Tide Table D. the Port List 2. For details of lights the larger scale charts and Admirlty Lists should be ______.

A. considered B. consulted C. concluded D. commanded 3. Red sectors of navigation lights warn mariners of ______.

A. floating debris(残骸) B. heavily trafficked areas C. recently sunken vessels D. shoals or nearby land

4. All straight lines represent great circle tracks on a chart based on a(n) ______.

A. Mercator projection B. polyconic projection C. orthographic projection D. gnomonic projection 5. Chart correction information is NOT disseminated through the ______.

A. Summary of Corrections B. Local Notice to Mariners C. Daily Memorandum D. Chart Correction Card 6. The arrangement of charts in the catalogue is ______.

A. on a regional basis B. on a national basis

C. shown orderly D. appeared from A to W

7. The heights and soundings of Admiralty chart are expressed ______ in Fathoms ______ in

Meters．

A. either，or B. neither，nor C. another，nor D. other，or 8. What is your ______ tropical storm warning information?

A. latest B. lately C. last D. nowadays 9. Admiralty Notices to Mariners are published ______.

A. every day B. every week C. every month D. every year

10. When there is not a chief officer on board, ______ should keep and write up the ship‘s logbook.

A. the assistant officer B. the captain C. the officer on duty D. the third officer 11. What is NOT accepted as the required shipping papers on a manned and loaded tank barge?

______.

A. Bill of Lading B. Manifest C. Shipping document D. Logbook entry 12. In writing up the log book at the end of your watch, you make an error, which of the following

is the way to correct the error？ ______.

A. Carefully and neatly erase the entry and rewrite it correctly

B. Remove this page of the log book and rewrite all entries on a clean page C. Blot out the error completely and rewrite the entry correctly

D. Cross out the error with a single line and rewrite the entry correctly 13. The injured stevedore paid ______ attention to the loading instructions.

A. small B. little C. few D. a few

14. The officer shall be ______ the marine enviroment when taking collision-avoiding action.

A. aware of B. clear of C. in charge of D. interested with 15. If the PSCO has ______ for believing that the ship, its equipment or its crew, do not

substantially meet the requirements, the PSCO should proceed to a more detailed inspection. A. clean report B. serious deficiencies C. clear ground D. detention report 16. The Master to prosecute all voyages with the utmost__________ and to render customary

assistance with the Vessel's Crew.

A. fastness B. speeding C. swiftness D. despatch 17. Instructions on how to conduct search and rescue are given in the ______．

A. MARPOL B. IRPCS C. SOLAS D. MERSAR 18. The ―urgent‖ priority should be used for messages ______.

A. concerning the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) B. detailing important navigational warnings

C. containing information concerning the safety of a mobile unit or person D. concerning on-scene communications

19. The oil residues which cannot be discharged into the sea in compliance with MARPOL 73/78

shall be ______.

A. discharged to into special area B. discharged into national waters C. discharged into the designated zone

D. retained on board or discharged to reception facilities 20. Your vessel is port side to a pier with a spring line led aft from the bow. In calm weather, putting

the engines ahead with the rudder hard left should bring ______. A. the bow in and the stern out B. both the bow and stern in

C. the bow out and the stern in D. retained on board or discharged to reception facilities 21. You are underway in fog and you hear one prolonged blast followed by two short blasts. This is a

vessel ______.

A. towing B. engaged on pilotage duty

C. aground in a fairway D. stopped and making no way through the water 22. If two mooring lines are to be placed on the same bollard，which method is BEST?

A. Place the eye from the forward line on the bollard and then place the eye from the second line directly over the first.

B. It makes no difference how the lines are placed.

C. Place the eye from either line on the bollard，and then bring the eye of the other line up through the eye of the first，and place it on the bollard. D. Place both eyes on the bollard，in any manner，but lead both lines to the same winch head on the vessel and secure them on the winch. 23. You have anchored in a mud and clay bottom. The anchor appears to be dragging in a storm.

What action should you take? A. Shorten the scope of the cable B. Veer cable to the anchor

C. Drop the other anchor underfoot

D. Drop the second anchor, veer to a good scope, then weigh the first anchor 24. A tug would NOT assist a ship to steer if the tug is made up to the large vessel ______.

A. by a tow line ahead of the vessel B. forward on either bow of the vessel C. approximately amidships of the vessel D. on the vessel's quarter 25. Mariners proceeding across the main routes are ______ to do so at as wide an angle as

practicable．

A. recommended B. reported C. applied D. complied 26. The term of Landfall means _______.

A. Land first sighted when vessel approaching from seaward B. Land last sighted when vessel leaving from a port C. in sight of one another when vessel underway D. in sight of an island during a ship on her voyage

27. You see another vessel approaching, and its compass bearing does not significantly change. This

would indicate that ______.

A. you are the stand-on vessel B. risk of collision exists

C. a special circumstances situation exists D. the other vessel is dead in the water 28. You are overtaking a vessel at night and you see a yellow light showing above the stern-light of

the overtaken vessel. The overtaken vessel is ______.

A. underway and dredging B. pushing ahead or towing alongside C. towing astern D. a pilot vessel 29. You are in charge of a stand-on vessel in a crossing situation. The other vessel is 1.5 miles to

port. You believe that risk of collision exists. You should ______.

A. take avoiding action immediately upon determining that risk of collision exists B. immediately sound the danger signal

C. take avoiding action only after providing the give-way vessel time to take action, and

determining that her action is not appropriate

D. hold course and speed until the point of extremis, and then sound the danger signal, taking

whatever action will best avert collision 30. The International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea ______ while carrying out search

and rescue operation．

A. apply fully B. apply half C. apply in part D. not apply 31. A large navigational buoy (LNB) is painted ______.

A. red B. yellow

C. with red and white vertical stripes

D. with a distinct color and pattern unique to each buoy

32. A single line of position combined with a dead-reckoning position results in a(n) ______.

A. running fix B. fix C. estimated position D. assumed position 33. When latitude and longitude are used, these shall be expressed in ______ (and decimals of a

minute if necessary), north or south of the Equator and east or west of Greenwich. A. fathoms and meters B. miles and kilometers C. arc and degrees D. degrees and minutes 34. The navigational term SET OF CURRENT means ______.

A. velocity of current in knots

B. direction from which the current flows C. estimated current

D. direction toward which the current flows 35. Currents are ______ in rate and direction.

A. vary B. variable C. variably D. variability

36. In mid-ocean，the characteristics of a wave are determined by three factors. What is NOT one

of these factors? ______.

A. Effect of the moon's gravity B. Fetch

C. Wind velocity D. Length of time a wind has been blowing 37. When the vessel arrives, the cargo of machinery to be unloaded is ______.

A. transported to the ship‘s side B. transported into the shed C. lashed and secured D. delivered to consignor 38. The Agent promised to keep me ______ of how our business was going on．

A. to be informed B. informed C. on informing D. informing 39. A microbarograph is a precision instrument that provides a ______.

A. charted record of atmospheric temperature over time B. charted record of atmospheric pressure over time

C. graphic record of combustible gases measured in an atmosphere

D. graphic record of vapor pressure from a flammable/combustible liquid

40. Sometimes a tropical storm moves so slowly that a vessel，if astern of it，can ______ it．

A. cross B. approach C. proceed near D. run into 41. You will cross the cold front of a low pressure system in about 24 hours. You should ______.

A. expect to see cirrus clouds followed by altostratus B. alter course to remain in the navigable semicircle

C. prepare for gusty winds, thunderstorms, and a sudden wind shift

D. expect clear weather, with steady winds and pressure, until the front passes 42. Ship's steering gear refers to ______.

A. cargo handling machines B. deck winches and derricks C. engine-room tools D. course controlling system

43. A design modification of an anchor chain which prevents kinking is the ______.

A. detachable link B. stud link C. Kenter link D. connecting link 44. The portable radio apparatus means ______.

A. the radio apparatus fitted on the portside B. the radio with a portable equipment

C. the radio equipment which is easily movable D. the portable radio with some apparatus

45. An immersion suit must be equipped with a(n) ______.

A. air bottle for breathing B. orange smoke canister

C. whistle，light and retroreflective material D. sea dye marker

46. Your radar is set on a true motion display. Which of the following will NOT appear to move

across the PPI scope? A. Echoes from a buoy B. Own ship‘s marker

C. Echo from a ship on the same course at the same speed D. Echo from a ship on a reciprocal course at the same speed 47. SWEEP INT on radar panel is the abbreviation of ______.

A. sweep introduction B. sweep interest C. sweep intention D. sweep intensity 48. There is a possibility that small vessel，ice and other floating objects may not be ______ by radar

at an adequate range．

A. reflect B. shown C. detected D. defected 49. Magnetic compass deviation ______.

A. varies depending upon the bearing used

B. is the angular difference between magnetic north and compass north C. is published on the compass rose on most nautical charts

D. is the angular difference between geographic and magnetic meridians 50. It is dangerous for vessels without the use of radar ______ the estuary．

A. to get B. to approach C. to proceed D. to close

51. Which one of the followings does not limit the effective range of radar?

A. pulse width B. pulse repetition frequency C. peak power D. target brightness 52. PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM: LOUDSPEAKERS IN THE VESSEL'S CABINS，MESS

ROOMS，ETC.，AND ON DECK VIA WHICH IMPORTANT INFORMATION CAN BE BROADCAST FROM A CENTRAL POINT，MOSTLY FROM THE NAVIGATION BRIDGE defines ______.

A. PP-system B. PA-system C. AP-system D. AA-system 53. All VHF marine band radios operate in the simplex mode，which means that ______.

A. only one person may talk at a time B. only two persons may talk at the same time C. the radio only transmits D. the radio only receives 54. When it is advisable to remain on VHF channel 14 you should say ______.

A. stand by on VHF channel 14 B. come to VHF channel 14

C. VHF channel 14 is the best place for you to stay by D. remain in channel 14 and do not change

55. A mark or place at which a vessel comes under obligatory entry，transit，or escort procedure is

know as ______.

A. Way point B. Receiving point C. Reporting point D. Closest Point 56. Our starboard derrick boom of hatch No．4 is badly cracked ______ that it has become entirely

useless．

A. at its goose neck to such a extent B. at it's goose neck to such an extent C. at it's goose neck for such a extent D. at its goose neck to such an extent 57. You can safely step in the bight of a line ______.

A. when it is not under strain B. if both ends are made fast C. in an emergency D. at no time

58. Placing a lashing across a hook to prevent a fitting from slipping out of the hook is called

______.

A. faking B. flemishing down C. mousing D. worming 59. On an anchor windlass，the wheel over which the anchor chain passes is called a ______.

A. brake compressor wheel B. devil's claw C. wildcat D. winchhead 60. A stay is ______.

A. standing rigging B. a downhaul C. a halyard D. a jib

61. A pattern according to which vessels and/or aircraft may conduct a co-ordinated search is a

______.

A. Research pattern B. Research mode

C. Search pattern D. Search and rescue mode 62. Recharging a previously used cartridge-operated dry-chemical extinguisher is accomplished by

______.

A. authorized fire equipment servicing personnel only

B. replacing the propellent cartridge and refilling with powder C. puncturing the cartridge seal after installation

D. recharging the cartridge and refilling it with powder 63. Which of the following statements is INCORRECT regarding a fire and boat drill on board

your cargo vessel?

A. At least one fire and boat drill shall be held within 24 hours of leaving a port where more

than 25 percent of the crew has been replaced．

B. The Master is responsible in seeing that each lifeboat is lowered to the water at least once in each 6 months．

C. Lifeboat equipment shall be examined at least once each month to insure that it is complete． D. An entry shall be made in the vessel's Official Logbook relative to each fire and boat drill. . I‘m on fire and have dangerous cargo on board．The most emergent assistance in this case would

be ______.

A. life boat B. helicopter C. fire-fighting D. medicine 65. An \"on-load\" release system on a survival craft means the cable can be released ______.

A. only when the load is taken off the cable

B. only when there is a load on the cable

C. only when activated by the controls at the lowering station D. at any time

66. When lowering lifeboats in heavy seas, a good practice is to rig frapping lines ______.

A. on only the forward falls B. on only the after falls

C. with a lead of about 45 degrees to the boat D. from the falls to the main deck of the vessel 67. Vessels carrying ______ must not willfully wash decks or holds.

A. general cargo B. steel products C. harmful cargo D. machinery

68. In reviving a person who has been overcome by gas fumes，what would you AVOID doing?

A. Giving stimulants

B. Prompt removal of the patient from the suffocating atmosphere C. Applying artificial respiration and massage D. Keeping the patient warm and comfortable

二、关联题（每组关联题题干下有4个小题，每小题有4个选项） 第一组

Charts should be used with prudence：there are areas where the source data are old，incomplete or of poor quality. The mariner should use the largest scale appropriate for his particular purpose；apart from being the most detailed，the larger scales are usually corrected first. When extensive new information (such as a new hydrographic survey) is received，some months must elapse before it can be fully incorporated in published charts. On small scale charts of ocean areas where hydrographic information is，in many cases，still sparse，charted shoals may be in error as regards position，least depth and extent. Undiscovered dangers may exist，particularly away from well-established routes. 69. ______are the most detailed.

A. the larger scale charts B. the smaller scale charts

C. the charts covering the area where the source data are old，incomplete or of poor quality D. the charts which are corrected to date

70. In the area ______the charted shoals are unlikely to be in error.

A. where hydrographic information is still sparse

B. where the source data are old，incomplete or of poor quality C. away from well-established routes

D. where new hydrographic survey information has just been incorporated in the charts 71. If the information provided by a chart covering an area where a new hydrographic survey has

just been carried out has still some error as regards position，least depth and extent of shoals，the most probable reason is that ______. A. the survey did not discover the shoals there B. the survey was incomplete or of poor quality

C. the survey was made away from well-established routes

D. the survey information has not yet been fully incorporated in the chart 72. This passage is most likely extracted from ______ of NM.

A. Section I - Explanatory Notes

B. Section II - Updates to Standard Navigational Charts C. Section III - Reprints of Radio Navigational Warnings D. Section IV - Amendments to Admiralty Sailing Directions

第二组

Nowadays，most merchant ships are built to carry cargoes. And they mainly operate as tramps. These vessels do not sail on regular routes or keep to a fixed timetable，but are employed where there is cargo for them to carry. Tramps can be classed as deep-sea tramps or short-sea tramps. A number are classed as coasters. These ply on coastal routes and up rivers to inland ports. The traditional tramp cargoes are dry bulk cargoes，but some are designed to carry general cargoes.

A large number of merchant ships operate as specialized vessels. These are designed to carry a particular type of cargo. There are several types of specialized vessel. The most common are oil tankers. They are owned by the major oil companies or by independent operators. Two other types of liquid bulk carrier of growing importance are chemical carriers and liquefied natural gas (LNG) carriers.

73. The deep-sea tramps ________.

A. carry bulk and general cargo across the high seas B. are built to carry passengers C. are mainly coasters D. are specialized vessel 74. The coasters ________.

A. always sail across the high seas B. commonly carry oil cargo C. are mainly tankers

D. sail on coastal routes and up rivers to inland ports 75. The importance of LNG carriers ________.

A. is growing

B. is not mentioned in passage C. is decreasing

D. will be discussed further if necessary

76. It is implied in the passage that ________.

A. the number of specialized vessels is not small

B. all oil tankers will carry some chemicals in near future

C. the tramps and specialized vessels are the basic type of merchant ships. D. container carriers should not be classed as tramps 三、中译英（共5题，请将答案写在答题纸上）

77. 值班驾驶员应亲自操作或监督舵工进行转换操作。 78. 深吃水船舶应特别注意位于航道中浅滩上的最新深度。

79. （航海日志）锚抓牢，6节入水，关闭航行灯，开启甲板照明灯。 80. （航海日志）1600检查甲板货发现冷藏集装箱压缩机不工作。 81. （航海日志）0730 4个工班来船，开始卸第1、3、5舱的货物。

题号--答案 1--C 6--A 题号--答案 2--B 7--A 题号--答案 3--B 8--A 题号--答案 4--D 9--B 题号--答案 5-- D 10--B 11--D 16--D 21-- A 26-- A 31--A 36--A 41--C 46--A 51--B 56--D 61--C 66--C 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

12--D 17-- D 22--C 27--B 32--C 37--C 42-- D 47--D 52-- B 57--D 62--B 67--C 13--B 18--C 23--D 28--C 33--D 38--B 43--B 48-- C 53--A 58--C 63--B 68--A 14--A 19--D 24--C 29--C 34--D 39--B 44--C 49--B 54--A 59--C --C 69--ADDA 15--C 20--A 25--A 30--A 35--B 40--D 45--C 50--B 55--B 60-- A 65--D 70--ADAA

从中海员能够了解潮汐资料 对于这些和另外的灯标的详细资料，大比例尺海图和英版灯标表应被

在海图上所有大圆航线表现为直线是基于 海图改正信息不被分散通过海图改正卡 目录中海图的排列是基于地区性的

英版海图上的高度和深度用拓米来表示 你热带风暴警告信息是什么 英版航海通告被出版‘

当大副不在船上时，谁应保存并填写航海日志？ 在配备有人员和装载油的驳船上，不被视为是要求的船舶文件 在你值班末了填写航海日记时记入了一个错误。以下哪一项纠正这个错误的方法？用单线划去错误的记录并写上正确的 13. 受伤的工副的装货指示‘ 14.

15. 假如PSC检查官根据船上的总印象或观察资料有明确的理由相信船舶的设备或其船员

无法充分满足要求，则PSC检查官应进行更详细的检查 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

如何指挥搜索和救助的说明在最早被用于商船的上给出 ―紧急‖优先权应用于包含涉及移动单元或人员安全的信息 依照MARPOL 73/78的规定不能排放入海的残油应被你船左舷靠在码头倒缆自首向后。在平静的天气里，左满舵进车将产生

21.

22. 假如两根系泊缆被套在同一个缆桩上，哪种方法最好？

23. 你锚泊在底质是泥和粘土的锚地。在风暴中出现拖锚。你将采取什么措施 24. 当拖船接近大船的船中部附近时，拖船将无法协助船舶改向 25. 行者进行穿越主航道时被推荐以尽可能大的角度（穿越） 26. 术语初见陆地意思是当船从海上接近陆地并第一次看到陆地时 27. 你看到一船接近且她的罗经方位没有明显的改变。这说明 28.

29. 在交叉态势中你负有直航船的责任。他船在左舷1.5海里。你相信存在碰撞危险。

30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. . 65.

1972年国际海上避碰规则海上搜救作业\\ 大型的航海浮筒（LNB）被油漆成

单一位置线与推算船位结合得到的船位是估算船位 当使用经纬度时，这些应被表达为（并小数点到分必要时），赤道的南北，格林威治的东西

航海中的流向意思是指 海流在速度和方向上是

在海洋，波浪的特性由三个因素决定。不是因素之一 船舶到达时，未开卸之前的货物(将要卸的货物) 代理承诺坚持让我我们业务进行的情况 微(气)压计是一个提供的精确仪器

虽然有时热带风暴移动得比船缓慢，但如果它在船之后，则可能陷入其中

船舶的操舵装臵指的是 为防止变形而改进的锚链是 便携式无线电设备意思是 救生服必须配备有口哨，灯光和放射材料 你的雷达设为真运动显示模式。以下哪一个在平面位臵显示器范围内将不出现移动？

SWEEP INT在雷达面板上是的缩写

在适当的量程上，小船，冰和其他漂浮的物体有可能不被雷达到的可能性\\ 磁罗经自差是 船舶不使用雷达港湾是危险的\\

以下哪个不会雷达的有效作用距离？ 公共广播系统：重要信息自中心，大多数在驾驶台通过在船的客舱，餐厅等和甲板上的喇叭能够被广播的系统定义为

所有海上甚高频无线电频段都采用单工模式，意思是 当VHF可以保持在14频道时，你应说 船舶归入必须的进入，通过或护航程序的点或位臵被称为 我们船第四舱右舷的吊杆严重损坏完全不能使用 你可以安全地进入海湾

穿越钓钩口放臵绑索以防止属具滑落钓钩称为 在起锚机上，锚链越过并通过它的轮子被称为 稳索是

根据船舶和/或航空器能够实行协调搜索而定的方式是 对于以前使用过的驱动式化学干粉灭火器的重新充装通过来完成

关于货船救生消防演习以下哪个句子是错误的？船长有责任看到每艘救生艇每六个月至少被降落到水中一次

我船失火并且船上有危险货物。在这种情况下最紧急的援助将是 带有压力释放器的救生艇筏可用手动等方式落放

66.

67. 装载的船舶不可任意冲洗甲板或货舱

68. 在让一个被煤烟气熏倒的人的复苏过程中，你将避免什么？

中华人民共和国海事局

2007年第1期海船船员适任证书全国统考试题（总第42期）

科目：航海英语 试卷代号：903 适用对象：无限航区、近洋航区二/三副

(本试卷卷面总分100分，及格分为70分，考试时间100分钟)

答题说明：请选择一个最合适的答案，并将该答案按答题卡要求，在相应位置上用2B铅笔涂黑．

第1题至68题，每题1分，第69题至76题，每题1．5分，第77题至81题每题4分。

一．单项选择题

1. By paying out more anchor cable，you ______.

A. decrease the holding power of your anchor

B. decrease the swing of your vessel while at anchor C. increase the holding power of your anchor

D. increase the possibility that your vessel will drag anchor 2. 3.

______ get your engine ready before six tomorrow morning．

A. You‘d better B. You would better C. You at least D. You at most

The outer limit of the Traffic Separation Schemes is ______ adjustment as necessary to comply with the port regulations．

A. subjected B. subject C. subjected to D. subject to 4. 5.

______ cargoes chargeable at the same rate，part of one ton shall be taken as one ton． A. At B. For C. On D. About

We have placed ______around the big oil slick on the water surface to prevent the spilt oil from further spreading out.

A. Oil dispersants B. Saw dust C. Booms D. Synthetic scoop The vessel is supposed ______ for Italy last week．

A. to have left B. to leave C. to be leaving D. to have been left What is your latest tropical storm warning ______？

A. information B. news C. description D. signals

Would you please ask the ______ Officer to issue 30 sheets of landing permits for our crew members to go ashore．

A. Quarantine B. Immigration C. Customs D. Harbor 9.

A vessel emitting harmful substances into the air or spilling oil into the sea is a ______． A. Polluter B. Emitter C. Spiller D. Oiler 10. Molded depth is measured from the ______.

A. inside of the shell B. outside of the shell

C. top of the center vertical keel D. top of the garboard stake 11. A vessel's quarter is that section which is ______.

A. abeam B. dead astern C. just aft of the bow D. on either side of the stern 12. In order to detect rot in manila lines，you should ______.

6. 7. 8.

A. feel the surface of the line for broken fibers

B. measure the reduction in circumference of the line C. observe any mildew on the outer surface

D. open the strands and examine the inner fibers 13. Fire may be spread by which means? ______.

A. Conduction of heat to adjacent surfaces B. Direct radiation C. Convection D. All of the above

14. A deck fitting，used to secure line or wire rope，consisting of a single body with two protruding

horns, is called a ______.

A. bitt B. bollard C. capstan D. cleat 15. All accidents and damage to ship，equipment or personnel，must be ______ in the vessel deck

log.

A. entered into B. entered C. entered with D. entered in 16. Life preservers must be marked with the ______.

A. stowage space assigned B. vessel's name

C. vessel's home port D. maximum weight allowed 17. Owing to the big draught of the ship，she has to go alongside by the time of ______.

A. spring tide B. flood tide C. ebb tide D. slack water 18. If a ship will call at four ports for discharging，i.e．A．B．C and D consecutively，the cargo for

______ must generally be loaded first．

A. Port A B. Port B C. Port C D. Port D 19. There is another thing I want to let you know．The lighting in the hold is very poor，even

______ dark to work the cargo．

A. if B. very C. too D. very much 20. We had the winch ______ last year．

A. to overhaul B. overhauling C. overhauled D. overhaul 21. A buoy marking a wreck will show a(n) ______ .

A. white light FL (2) and a topmark of 2 black spheres B. occulting green light and may be lettered C. yellow light and will be numbered

D. continuous quick white light and may be numbered

22. A tanker is cargo ship constructed or ______ for the carriage in bulk liquid cargoes of an

inflammable nature.

A. adapted B. adopted C. damp D. dump 23. The majority of cargo gear breakdowns are a result of ______．

A. Guy failures B. Topping lift failures C. Bending of the boom from compression D. Gooseneck failure

24. No oil or mixture containing oil ______ into Singapore waters from any vessel．

A. shall not be discharged B. shall be discharged C. shall be filled D. shall not be filled

25. Dunnage may be used to protect a cargo from loss or damage by ______ .

A. ship's sweat B. inherent vice C. tainting D. hygroscopic absorption 26. During loading or discharging，the tallymen must make contact with ______ on duty so as to

solve problems in time．

A. ship owner B. ship‘s officers C. shippers D. consignors 27. You should plot your dead reckoning position ______.

A. when you obtain an estimated position B. ONLY in piloting waters C. at every speed change D. All of the above are correct 28. Mooring ______ are placed on both banks of the Suez Canal about 200m apart．

A. bollards B. ballasts C. bands D. benefits

29. It is sometimes necessary to moor bow and stern to two mooring buoys in order to ______．

A. avoid any swing in a restricted space B. shelter the ship from strong winds

C. prevent to touch with other vessels D. make a convenience of cargo discharging 30. ______ water is the water to keep the ship‘s stability.

A. Bilge B. Ballast C. Slop D. Sanitary 31. A check rope is ______.

A. a safety line attached to a man working over the side B. used to measure water depth

C. used to slow the headway of a barge

D. used to measure the overhead height of a bridge 32. In relation to the turning circle of a ship，the term advance means the distance ______.

A. gained at right angles to the original course B. gained in the direction of the original course

C. moved sidewise from the original course when the rudder is first put over D. around the circumference of the turning circle 33. A twin screw vessel，making headway with both engines turning ahead，will turn more readily to

starboard if you ______. A. reverse port engine，apply right rudder B. reverse port engine，rudder amidships C. reverse starboard engine，apply right rudder D. reverse starboard engine，rudder amidships 34. Information on shipping movements can be ______ by radio from Dover Port Control．

A. got B. made C. obtained D. taken 35. There shall be two principal ______ through the harbor for the passage of vessels．

A. straits B. channels C. canals D. roadsteads 36. From ______ the mariner can know the data of tide．

A. the Sea Pilot B. the Cargo Plan C. the Tide Table D. the Port List 37. Vessels in port may use ______ for receiving typhoon warnings during the typhoon season．

A. their transmitters B. their receivers C. their radars D. their GPS 38. A wind vane on a moving vessel shows ______.

A. dead reckoning wind direction B. true wind direction

C. relative wind direction D. estimated wind direction 39. In the doldrums(赤道无风带) you can expect ______.

A. steady，constant winds B. frequent rain showers and thunderstorms C. steep pressure gradients D. low relative humidity

40. A cloud sequence of cirrus，cirrostratus，and altostratus clouds followed by rain usually signifies

the approach of a(n) ______.

A. occluded front B. stationary front C. warm front D. cold front 41. When warm moist air is blown over a colder surface, ______ will happen.

A. advection fog B. radiation fog C. dense fog D. steam fog

42. In Beaufort Scale，the wind force 7 with speed of 28-33 knots is defined as ______ .

A. Moderate gale B. Near gale C. Strong gale D. Whole gale 43. The Admiralty Notices to Mariners can be obtained ______ by Masters of vessels from any

Admiralty Chart Agent．

A. free of charge B. with no responsibility C. without limitations of distribution D. with little charges

44. In revised editions of Admiralty charts the ______ are corrected first．

A. smaller scales B. larger scales C. smaller scales and larger scales D. moderate scales 45. On small scale charts of ocean areas where hydrographic information is，in many cases，still

______ ，charted shoals may be in error as regards position，depth and extent． A. spare B. spade C. sparse D. spear 46. On a chart，the characteristic of the light on a lighthouse is shown as flashing white with a red

sector. The red sector ______.

A. indicates the limits of the navigable channel B. indicates a danger area

C. is used to identify the characteristics of the light D. serves no significant purpose 47. Which statement is TRUE of a stiff vessel?

A. She will have an unusually high center of gravity B. She will have a large metacentric height C. She will pitch heavily

D. Her period of roll will be large due to her large metacentric height

48. For details of these and other lights the larger scale charts and Admiralty Lists should be

______ .

A. considered B. consulted C. concluded D. commanded

49. Coast Pilots and navigational charts are kept corrected and up-to-date by using the ______.

A. pilot charts B. Notices to Mariners C. Tide Tables D. Current Tables 50. The issue of Notices to Mariners of charts and these aids(Radar beacons)may be delayed until

such time as they are assessed to be ______．

A. temporary B. permanent C. occasional D. steady

51. In which voyage，between two points，is the rhumb line distance NOT approximately the same

as the great circle distance? ______.

A. The two points are in low latitudes in the same hemisphere B. The two points are in high latitudes in the same hemisphere C. The two points are near the equator，but in different hemispheres

D. One point is near the equator，one point is in a high latitude，and both are near the 180th meridian

52. A tide is called diurnal when ______.

A. only one high and one low water occur during a lunar day B. the high tide is higher and the low tide is lower than usual C. the high tide and low tide are exactly six hours apart D. two high tides occur during a lunar day 53. Positions read from this chart should be moved 0．08 minutes Southward and 0．13 minutes

Eastward so as ______ adjoining chart 3833．

A. to agree upon B. in accordance with C. to be same as D. to agree with

54. Contour elevations on this chart refer to heights in feet above mean ______.

A. lower low water B. high water C. low water D. sea level 55. Mariners proceeding across the main routes are recommended to do so at ______.

A. as wide an angle as practicable B. as wide an angle so practicable C. like wide an angle as practicable D. like wide as angle so practicable

56. The productivity of working shifts can be improved through a decrease of ______.

A. working hours B. gangs C. idle time D. weight per set 57. It may be found that，in certain circumstances，radar beacon emissions can cause ______ with

the normal radar display，particularly at close range． A. unwanted interference B. unexpected figures C. abnormal data D. unwanted information 58. Before sailing，mariners on duty shall check the headings of magnetic compass by comparison

with ______．

A. ship's clock B. engine movement recorder C. repeaters D. navigation lights 59. In determining if risk of collision exists，such risk may sometimes exist even when an

appreciable bearing change is evident，particularly when approaching ______．

A. very large vessel B. a long tow C. a vessel at close range D. all A，B and C 60. I have pleasure in informing you that all safety equipment is in ______ working order．

A. full B. care C. intentional D. reasonable 61. The abbreviation PPI in the Sperry Collision Avoidance System means ______．

A. plan position indicator B. plain position indicator C. plane position indication D. policy proof of interest

62. Defense plans may cause the operation of electronic aids to navigation to be suspended with

______.

A. no notice B. one day's notice C. a week's notice D. thirty (30) days notice 63. Calibration Stations give special transmissions for the calibration of ship's ______．

A. gyro-compass B. marine radar C. DF D. navigational satellite

. The annual change in ______ is 0.2 degree east in this water area．

A. marine insurance B. magnetic variation C. maritime accident D. mean high water 65. The maximum draft to which a vessel can legally be submerged is indicated by the ______.

A. Loadline mark B. Certificate of Inspection C. Station Bill D. Tonnage mark 66. Two vessels meeting in a head- on situation are directed by the Rules to ______.

A. alter course to starboard and pass port to port B. alter course to port and pass starboard to starboard

C. decide on which side the passage will occur by matching whistle signals D. slow to bare steerageway

67. You are watching another vessel approach and her compass bearing is not changing. This means

that ______.

A. you are the stand-on vessel B. a risk of collision exists

C. a special circumstances situation exists D. the other vessel is dead in the water 68. Which craft is a power-driven vessel under the Rules of the Road? ______.

A. An auxiliary sailing vessel，using her engine B. A canoe propelled by a small outboard motor C. A trawler on her way to the fishing grounds

D. All of the above

二．关联题（每组关联题题干下有4个小题，每小题4个选项） 第一组：

An Automatic Identification System, or AIS for short is device that transmits information about your ship and receives the same from other ships. The SOLAS convention already states that an AIS must be fitted on ships over a period of time, ranging from 2002 to 2008 depending on ship type and tonnage. An example of information transmitted would be: Call sign, ship‘s name, the ship‘s speed, its course and destination. The AIS is an important tool for coastal states to monitor ship traffic and to detect possible threats. Coast stations can also receive this information

69. What does AIS mean?

A. Automatic Information System B. Automatic Identification System C. Automatic Indication System D. Automatic Identification Safety 70. When must AIS be fitted on ships?

A. Ranging from 2002 to 2008 B. Ranging from 2003 to 2008 C. Ranging from 2004 to 2008 D. Ranging from 2002 to 2006 71. What information does AIS not transmit?

A. Ship‘s name. B. Call sign. C. Ship‘ speed. D. Captain‘s name 72. What are roles for AIS?

A. to transmit the ship‘s information B. to receives other‘s information C. to monitor ship traffic by costal states D. All above

第二组：

At about 0750 on 13 February 2001, the crew were performing a lifeboat launching drill. While attempting to return the port lifeboat, with 7 crew members in it, from the boat deck level to its stow position, the wire falls parted, the davit arms and lifeboat fell outboard. The lifeboat did not pass free of the boat deck as it normally would, but landed on the edge of the boat deck with the davit arms on top of it. The boat teetered there momentarily and then rolled over the edge, falling some 16 m to the sea and landing upside down.

The lifeboat self-righted and remained attached to the ship by its painter. Ambulances were called by radio. The port company pilot boat was nearby and assisted to take medics to the lifeboat. The lifeboat crew were transferred to the pilot launch, taken over to waiting ambulances and sent to hospital for treatment.

73. The ______ are not riggings of lifeboat.

A. wire falls B. painters C. davit arms D. medics 74. The lifeboat ______.

A. fell into the sea directly

B. fell on the top of the davit arms

C. fell some 16 m into the sea from about its stow position

D. dropped on the edge of boat deck and then rolled over into the sea 75. It is inferred that the ______.

A. the lifeboat will always fall into the sea in a upright position

B. even dropped into sea upside down the lifeboat will automatically turn upright

C. the lifeboat will normally drop onto boat deck, teetered there momentarily and then rolled over into sea

D. the lifeboat fell often, normally freely, from its stow position into sea

76. Of the following, ______ should be considered as the lesson of this accident.

A. in this circumstance and condition the crew should be removed from the lifeboat before attempting to bring it back to its stow position

B. when performing a lifeboat launching drill, the responsible officer should call ambulances to standby at ship sides

C. the painter should be unfastened when the lifeboat is attempted to bring back to its stow position

D. the lifeboat crew should learn more nautical terms such as davit arms, wire falls, and painters

三．中译英（共5题，请将答案写在答题纸上） 77．试验检查消防泵和火警探测器，情况良好。 78．应备齐足够的新版航路指南供本航次使用。 79．（航海日志）0918在检疫锚地抛锚，以待检疫。 80．（航海日志）由船长指挥通过狭水道。 81．（航海日志）由于风太大，救助直升机无法降落。 题号--答案 1--C 6--A 11--D 16--B 21-- A 26-- B 31--C 36--C 41--A 46--B 51--B 56--C 61--A 66--A 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

题号--答案 2--A 7--A 12--D 17-- A 22--A 27--C 32--B 37--B 42-- B 47--B 52-- A 57--A 62--A 67--B 题号--答案 3--D 8--B 13--D 18--D 23--A 28--A 33--C 38--C 43--A 48-- B 53--D 58--C 63--C 68--D 题号--答案 4--B 9--A 14--D 19--C 24--B 29--A 34--C 39--B 44--B 49--B 54--D 59--D --B 69--BADD 题号--答案 5-- C 10--A 15--B 20--C 25--A 30--B 35--B 40--C 45--C 50--B 55--A 60-- A 65--A 70--DDBA 通过送出更多的锚链，你

明天早上6点以前备妥主机

必要时，分道通航制的外边界按（受限于）港口规则予以调整

按同一费率收费的货物，不足一吨算作一吨

那船被推测上星期你最新的热带风暴

意大利 是什么

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49.

请你要求为我们船员的上岸发放30张登陆许可证，行吗 一船散发有害气体到空气中或泄露油到水中是 型深自船量起 船尾舷是指 为了检测马尼拉绳的腐烂，你应 火灾可以通过哪中方式被蔓延？ 一个甲板装臵，用于固定绳索或钢丝绳，由具有两个突出角的单体组成的叫

所有船舶，设备或人员的事故和损害必须被记入船舶的航海日志 救生浮具必须标记以

由于船舶的大吃水，她只好在高潮时靠泊

假如船舶将连续地挂靠四个卸货港A，B，C和D，则的货物通常必须被最早装船 我想让你知道另一件事。货舱内的照明很差， 去年我们已对起货机做了 标记沉船的浮筒将显示白光闪（2）且顶标为两个黑球体 油轮是建造或适用于运输易燃性质的散装液体货的货船 大多数的货物机械损坏是由于 没有任何船舶油或含油混合物新加坡水域中 垫舱物料可被用于保护由于导致的货物损坏或损失 在装卸货其间，理货员应该和当班驾驶员联络以便即使解决问题 在每一个移线定位，航线改变和速度改变时你应标绘推算船位 Suez运河两岸的之间的距离大约为200米 为了有时有必要船首尾系两个浮筒

（驳船）止荡线被用于减缓驳船前进时的偏荡 关于船舶的旋回圈，术语纵距(又称―进距‖)意指

一双车船使用双车前进掉头，将更易于向右舷掉头假如船舶运动的信息能够通过Dover港口控制 那里应有两条60吨以上船舶通过港口的主要航道 从中海员能够了解潮汐资料 在台风季节，港内的船舶可以使用接收台风警告

距离

在赤道无风带你预期到 云的顺序为卷云，卷层云，高层云并有雨通常象征着的临近 平流雾最普遍产生于温暖潮湿的空气吹过较冷的水面 在Beaufort风力表中，风速28到33节的7级风被定义为 船长能够从任何的英版海图供应商那里获得英版航海通告 在英版海图修订版中，被最先改正 在很多情况下，大洋水域的小比例尺海图的水文资料仍，所标水区的位臵，水深和范围可能有误

在海图上，灯塔的灯光特性被显示为白和红的扇区。红扇区 有关稳性过大的船，哪一个是正确的？她具有大的横稳性值

对于这些和另外的灯标的详细资料，大比例尺海图和英版灯标表应被 航路指南和航行海图通过使用被改正和保持最新‗

50. 海图和这些助航设备的航海通告发行可能被延迟直到他们被永久的确定 51. 在什么样航程中，两点之间的恒向线的距离与大圆距离相差较大？

52. 的潮汐叫全日潮 53. 为与3994海图一致，从这张海图上读取的位置应往北推移0.03分 54. 这海图的正面等高线指的是英尺表示的平均以上的高度 55. 航海者穿越主航道被推荐以穿越‘ 56. 工班的工作效率能够通过减少来提高 57. 在一定的环境下，可能会发现雷达信标的发射导致雷达正常显示，特别在近

距离时

58. 在开航之前，值班驾驶员应核对比较磁罗经艏向和 59. 在确定是否存在碰撞危险，有时这样的危险可能存在即使当方位有明显变化，特别是接

近时 60. 我高兴地告诉你所有设备运转正常‘ 61. 缩写词PPI在Sperry避碰系统中的意思是 62. 国防演习计划可能导致电子助航设备的运作暂时关闭 63. 校准场为船舶的校准提供特殊的发射信号 . 在这个水域的年变化量是-0.2度东 65. 船舶能够被合法淹没的最大吃水通过指示 66. 两船以对遇形式相遇被规则规定为 67. 你正在观测另一艘船并且其罗经方位没有变化。这意味着 68. 哪个船舶是（交通）规则中的机动船？

中华人民共和国海事局

2006年第3期海船船员适任证书全国统考试题（总第41期）

科目：航海英语 试卷代号：903 适用对象：无限航区、近洋航区二/三副

(本试卷卷面总分100分，及格分为70分，考试时间100分钟)

答题说明：请选择一个最合适的答案，并将该答案按答题卡要求，在相应位置上用2B铅笔涂黑．

第1题至68题，每题1分，第69题至76题，每题1．5分，第77题至81题每题4分。

一．单项选择题 1． For details of these and other lights the larger scale charts and Admiralty Lists should be ______．

A．considered B．consulted C．concluded D．commanded

2． Many of the lights on this coast are placed so high as to be frequently obscured by ______．

A．power B．tower C．cover D．low clouds 3． The lighthouse if ______ at night may be in trouble．

A．invisible B．it is invisible C．isn't visible D．unvisible 4． Several shoals ______ reported to exist in the area south-west of the Brothers．

A．have B．have been C．has D．has been 5． In revised editions of Admiralty charts the ______ are corrected first．

A．smaller scales B．larger scales

C．smaller scales and larger scales D．moderate scales

6． The shoreline shown on nautical charts of areas affected by large tidal fluctuations is usually the

line of mean ______．

A．lower low water B．low water C．tide level D．high water

7． During daylight savings time the meridian used for determining the time is located farther

______．

A．west in west longitude and east in east longitude B．east in west longitude and west in east longitude C．west D．east

8． Attention is ______ the advice on the use of charts in The Mariner's Handbook Chapter 3，

Section 1．

A．fixed to B．needed for C．pushed to D．drawn to 9． Charted depths ______ by 2 meters due to state of the winds．

A．is decreased B．decreased C．decreases D．are decreased 10．______ the abstracts of deck logbook covering the said accident．

A．Attached herewith are B．Attached is herewith C．Attached are hereby D．Hereby are attached

11．Every entry required to be made in the Official Logbook shall be signed by the ______．

A．Mate on watch

B．Master and Chief Mate or other member of the crew C．Master only

D．Purser，one of the Mates，and some other member of the crew 12．Logbooks are used to record the events occurring when ______．

A．the ship is in a harbor B．the ship is at anchorage C．the ship is underway D．all of the above

13．An accident came ______ my mind when I saw the broken case．

A．in B．on C．to D．with

14．The SMS should provide for specific measures aimed at promoting the ______of equipment or

systems the sudden operational failure of which may result in hazardous situations． A．visibility B．ability C．reliability D．capability 15．A qualified deck officer should be ______ the watch．

A．in charge of B．arranged C．decided to D．the depth of

16．How many GMDSS operators are needed/required on board according to the provisions of the

International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea,1974? ______．

A．4 operators B．3 operators C．2 operators D．1 operator

17．Instructions on how to conduct search and rescue are given in the ______ which is primarily

designed for use by merchant ship．

A．MARPOL B．IRPCS C．SOLAS D．MERSAR

18．Annex V to MARPOL 73/78 contains requirements pertaining to the discharge into the marine

environment of ______．

A．oil B．garbage C．noxious liquid substances D．None of the above 19．Apparent wind speed blowing across a vessel under tow can be measured by a(n) ______．

A．barometer B．wind vane C．anemometer D．thermometer

20．After casting off moorings at a mooring buoy in calm weather，you should ______．

A．go full ahead on the engine(s)

B．back away a few lengths to clear the buoy and then go ahead on the engines C．go half ahead on the engines and put the rudder hard right D．go half ahead on the engines and pass upstream of the buoy

21．The most doubtful and unpredictable factor in a mooring system is the ______．

A．ability of the anchors to hold in a seabed B．anchor chain catenary length C．variability of the fairlead D．angle of the flukes 22．Chafing gear should be placed ______．

A．at all wearing points of mooring lines B．at the bitter ends of all standing rigging C．around running rigging D．on wire rope only forces

23．Owing to the big draught of the ship，she has to go alongside by the time of ______．

A．spring tide B．flood tide C．ebb tide D．slack water

24．The rules state that vessels may depart from the requirements of the Rules when ______．

A．there are no other vessels around B．operating in a narrow channel

C．the Master enters it in the ship's log D．necessary to avoid immediate danger 25．Mariners proceeding across the main routes are ______ to do so as wide an angle as

practicable．

A．recommended B．reported C．applied D．complied

26．A tug would NOT assist a ship to steer if the tug is made up to the large vessel ______．

A．by a tow line ahead of the vessel B．forward on either bow of the vessel C．approximately amidships of the vessel D．on the vessel's quarter 27．Where one of two vessels is to keep out of the way the other ______．

A．shall not keep her course but shall keep her speed B．shall not keep her course and speed

C．shall keep her course but change her speed D．shall keep her course and speed

28．All of the following are engaged in fishing EXCEPT ______．

A．A vessel trawling B．A vessel trolling C．A vessel setting nets D．A vessel tending lines 29．When underway in a channel,you should keep to the ______．

A．middle of the channel B．starboard side of the channel

C．port side of the channel D．side of the channel that has the widest turns 30．The two vessels underway may collide with ______,if they don't take immediate measures．

A．one to another B．one the other C．each the other D．each other 31．The shortest distance between any two points on earth defines a ______．

A．small circle B．great circle C．rhumb line D．hyperbola 32．When a buoy marks a channel bifurcation(分支), the preferred channel is NOT indicated by

______．

A．the shape of an unlighted buoy B．the light color of a lighted buoy C．the color of the topmost band D．whether the number is odd or even

33．Uncharted lights, fog signals and radar beacon transmissions may be ______ near the station．

A．encountered B．met C．contacted D．seen 34．Spring tides occur ______．

A．when the moon is new or full

B．when the moon and sun have declination of the same name C．only when the moon and sun are on the same sides of the earth D．at the beginning of spring when the sun is over the equator 35．The set of the ocean current is caused by ______．

A．density differences of the water B．rotation of the earth C．direction of primary circulation of air D．all of the above 36．You are docking a vessel．If possible,you should ______．

A．go in with the current B．go in against the current

C．approach the dock at a 90Deg angle and swing to

D．at the beginning of spring when the sun is over the equator

37．All the holds to be loaded with grain must be swept ______ commencement of loading．

A．cleanly／during B．clear／meanwhile C．clean／between D．clean／prior to 38．Stop ______ the derrick at once，the gooseneck is bent．

A．to use B．to operate C．maneuvering D．using 39．The actual amount of cargo loaded depends upon ______．

A．the broken stowage listed B．the broken stowage calculated C．the broken stowage given D．the actual broken stowage

40．The Routing System which aimed at reducing the risk of casualties is called as ______．

A．Traffic Separation Schemes B．Recommended tracks C．Precautionary areas D．Inshore traffic zones

41．What kind of conditions would you observe as the eye of a storm passes over your ship's position?

A．Huge waves approaching from all directions,clearing skies,light winds,and an extremely low

barometer B．Flat calm seas,heavy rain,light winds,and an extremely low barometer C．Flat calm seas,heavy rain,light winds,and high pressure

D．Huge waves approaching from all directions,clearing skies,light winds,and high pressure 42．When completed their duty, pilots want the master of the vessel to fill in ______．

A．their yellow books B．their pilotage forms C．their identification cards D．their pilotage licenses 43．When force of winds reaches 10-11 in Beaufort scale，we usually call such wind ______．

A．Gale B．Storm C．Hurricane D．Typhoon 44．Which of the following is a characteristic of a Ro-Ro vessel?

A．Passenger tours available upon docking B．Long port stays necessary to secure vehicles C．Short in port turnaround times

D．Heavy vehicles only require lightweight securing equipment 45．After a cold front passes,the barometric pressure ______．

A．drops,and the temperature drops B．drops,and the temperature rises C．rises,and the temperature drops D．rises,and the temperature rises

46．On a vessel with a single propeller,transverse force has the most effect on the vessel when the

engine is put ______．

A．full ahead B．full astern C．half ahead D．slow astern 47．A Doppler log in the bottom return mode indicates the ______．

A．velocity of the current B．bottom characteristics C．depth of the water D．speed over the ground

48．On a ship，a door that is required to be marked KEEP CLOSED is designed to ______．

A．prevent the passage of flammable gases B．prevent the passage of poisonous vapors C．delay the spread of heat and flames D．maintain watertight integrity 49．When navigating in thick fog with the radar on, you should ______．

A．station the look-out in the wheelhouse to keep a continuous watch on the radar B．secure the sounding of fog signals until a vessel closes within five miles C．station a look-out as low down and far forward as possible

D．keep the radar on the shortest available range for early detection of approaching vessels 50．Your radar is set on a true motion display．Which of the following will NOT appear to move

across the PPI scope? A．Echoes from a buoy B．Own ship's marker

C．Echo from a ship on the same course at the same speed D．Echo from a ship on a reciprocal course at the same speed 51．When hitting a solid object such as a ship or an airplane,the radar waves are reflected back ______

they came．

A．in the way B．the way C．by the way D．through the path

52．There is a possibility that small vessel, ice and other floating objects may not be ______ by radar

at an adequate range．

A．reflect B．shown C．detected D．defected

53．Indications of the master gyrocompass are sent to remote repeaters by the ______．

A．follow-up system B．transmitter C．phantom element D．azimuth motor 54．Most LOG use the doppler shift of the carrier phase to compute ______．

A．Latitude B．Longitude C．Speed D．Time

55．The correction to be applied to a Loran-C reading when matching a sky wave to a ground wave

may be found ______．

A．on loran charts covering areas where sky waves are used B．in the Radio Aids to Navigation PUB 117 C．in the Loran-C Correction Tables

D．Sky waves cannot be matched to ground waves in Loran-C to produce a usable reading 56．The most common type of davit found on merchant vessels today is the ______．

A．radial B．sheath-screw C．gravity D．quadrantal 57．What is the basic concept of GMDSS?

A．Search and rescue authorities ashore can be alerted to a distress situation B．Shipping in the immediate vicinity of a ship in distress will be rapidly alerted

C．Shoreside authorities and vessels can assist in a coordinated SAR operation with minimum

Delay D．All of the above

58．Which would be the subject of a NAVAREA warning?

A．A drifting buoy sighted in mid-ocean

B．Extinguishment of Wolf Trap Light located inside Chesapeake Bay C．All military exercises on the high seas involving four or more vessels D．Off-air times of radio beacons when scheduled for routine maintenance

59．The present voyage of my ship began at the port of Shanghai after loading 8 000 tons of Cargo

on board and ended after discharging the Cargo at the port of Hong Kong which was ______． A．the port of destination B．the port for bunkering C．the port of arrival D．the last port of call

60．If you receive the signal over radiotelephone of \"Romeo Papa Tango\" while using the

International Code of Signals, you should ______．

A．report to the caller B．repeat your last transmission

C．continue since he received your last transmission D．end the transmission 61．You are using an automatic tension winch by yourself．If you get caught in the turns of the line as

they lead into the gypsyhead ______．

A．the safety cutout will stop the winch before you're injured B．the line will part and snap back

C．you may be pulled into the winch and injured or killed D．None of the above are correct

62．The circular steel structure installed around the propeller of a towboat is the ______．

A．nozzle B．shroud C．strut D．hood 63．A spring line leads ______．

A．fore and aft from the ship's side B．to the dock at a right angle to the vessel C．through the bull nose or chock at the bow D．through the chock at the stern ．The key to rescuing a man overboard is ______．

A．good communication B．a dedicated crew C．good equipment D．well-conducted drills

65．Which equipment is the primary source of generating a locating signal?

A．DSC only B．DSC and EPIRB C．SART and DSC D．EPIRB and SART 66．Inspection of a Halon extinguisher involves checking the hose, handle, nozzle, and ______．

A．sight glass B．weighing the extinguisher C．service technicians report D．last date it was charged 67．The purpose of air tanks in a lifeboat is to ______．

A．make the boat float higher B．provide a stowage place for provisions C．add strength to the boat D．keep the boat afloat if flooded

68．This is an exercise area．Mariners are ______ to navigate with caution．

A．advised B．told C．informed D．advice

二．关联题（每组关联题题干下有4个小题，每小题4个选项） 第一组：

Sudden steering system failure of an oil tanker led to collision with a passing bulk carrier in the Baltic Sea. The collision resulted in serious damage to both vessels and spillage of 2,700 tonnes

of fuel oil from the tanker.

The cause of the sudden steering failure could not be established. Small passing distance (0.5 miles) between the two vessels precluded effective avoidance action being taken on both vessels. Both vessels unnecessarily restricted their passing distance by choosing the deepwater route although their relatively shallow draft permitted them to use the recommended directions of traffic flow outside the deepwater route.

Vessels should avoid using deepwater routes when their draft permits them to use a traffic separation scheme. OOW should remain at heightened alert when passing another vessel at close range and should be vigilant(警惕) for equipment failure and unexpected response from own or other vessel including interaction between vessels passing each other at close distances.

69．What happened in the story?

A．An oil tanker grounded and spilled a large quantity of oil

B．A bulk carrier collided with a sunken rock and spilled some fuel oil C．An oil tanker collided with a bulk carrier and spilled some fuel oil D．A bulk carrier collided with an oil tanker and spilled some fuel oil 70．Which of the following statements is true?

A．Improper maintenance led to the steering system failure B．Both vessels took effective avoidance action

C．There was not sufficient depth of water in the channel D．Both vessels chose the deepwater route 71．Which of the following statements is NOT true?

A．Vessels shall never use deepwater routes B．OOW shall always keep a sharp lookout

C．OOW shall be watchful for the equipment failure

D．OOW shall be careful at the response from other vessel 72．Which of the following may be the cause of the accident?

A．Sudden steering failure B．Restricted passing distances C．Both A and B D．Neither A nor B

第二组：

Crewmembers and other personnel onboard must familiarize themselves with the Muster list and Emergency Instructions posted up in the crew‘s quarters and other conspicuous(显著的) places.

The Muster list specifies details of the general emergency alarm signal and also action to be taken by crew and passengers when this alarm is sounded; specifies how the order to abandon ship shall be given; shows the duties assigned to the different members of the crew in connection with the closing of various doors and mechanisms, the equipping of the lifeboats and buoyant apparatus, the general preparation of any other boats, buoyant apparatus, inflatable life rafts and all other matters, and the extinction of fire; specifies which officers are assigned to ensure that life-saving and fire-fighting

appliances are maintained in good conditions and are ready for immediate use; specifies definite signals for calling all members of the crew to their boat and fire stations and shall give full particulars of these signals.

73．Which function of the followings is not mentioned about Muster list in the passage?

A．How to order to abandon ship

B．How to assemble the crew and passengers

C．The apparatuses used to release various alarms

D．The actions of a crewmember onboard when in emergencies

74．The phase ―familiarize themselves with‖ in the first paragraph means ______.

A．Be familiar with B．Familiarity with C．Get in touch with D．Used to

75．The word ―extinction‖ in the second paragraph means ______.

A．Ignition B．Existing C．Extinguishing D．Breaking out 76．Which one of the followings is false?

A．Muster list shows officers‘ duties only

B．Muster list is posted up in the crew‘s quarters and other conspicuous places

C．Muster list specifies which officers are in charge of the maintenance of lifesaving and

firefighting appliances

D．All of the above

三．中译英（共5题，请将答案写在答题纸上）

77．(航海日志) 航经海盗多发区域，夜间安排船员巡逻。

78．(航海日志) 0830物料和食品按定单供船，1200前尖舱加200吨淡水。

79．(航海日志) 1400装货完毕，1500水尺检测量完毕，1530主机备妥，等待引水登船。 80．所有登船人员必须接受值班人员的检查和登记。 81．灭火器的数量和类型根据防火控制图进行布置。 题号--答案 1--B 6--D 11--B 16--D 21--A 26--C 31--B 36--B 41--A 46--B 51--D 56--C 61--C 1.

题号--答案 2--D 7--D 12--D 17--D 22--A 27--D 32--D 37--D 42--B 47--D 52--C 57--D 62--A 题号--答案 3--A 8--D 13--C 18--B 23--A 28--B 33--A 38--D 43--B 48--D 53--B 58--D 63--A 题号--答案 4--B 9--D 14--C 19--C 24--D 29--B 34--A 39--D 44--C 49--C 54-- C 59--A --D 题号--答案 5--B 10--A 15--A 20--B 25--A 30--D 35--D 40--A 45--C 50--A 55--A 60--B 65--D 66--B 67--D 68--A 69--CDAC 70--CACA 对于这些和另外的灯标的详细资料，大比例尺海图和英版灯标表应被 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 这个沿岸的许多灯标被臵于高处以致经常被阵雨 夜间灯塔，则可能是出故障了 在Brothers的西南区域存在有几个浅滩 在英版海图修订版中，被最先改正

在实现夏时制其间，用于确定时间的子午线位于更向东一些。

海员手册关于海图的使用的一些建议 于风的状况，(海图)标示深度2米

包含上述事故的航海日志摘要

每一个被要求记录到正式航海日志的内容必须被船长，大付或其他船员签字 航海日志用于记录船舶在港，锚泊，在航时发生的事件 当我看见打破的箱子时，事故便出现在我的脑海里

SMS应提供有针对提高设备或系统在可能导致危险情形的意外故障的可靠性的明确措施

合格的驾驶员应值班

根据SOLAS公约的规定，船上必须要求配备 如何指挥搜索和救助的说明在最早被用于商船的上给出 MARPOL 73/78公约附录五包含有与向海洋环境排放垃圾有关的要求 吹越拖带船的视风速能够通过被测量‗ 在好天气条件下，解掉浮筒的缆绳后，你将 在系泊系统中最含糊和最不可预知的因素是锚抓底的能力 防（摩）擦装臵应被放在上 由于船舶的大吃水，她只好在高潮时靠泊

规则规定船舶可能背离规则的要求当有必要避免紧迫危险 航行者进行穿越主航道被尽可能大角度‗

当拖船接近大船的船中部附近时，拖船将无法协助船舶改向 假如两艘机动船中一艘让路时，则另一艘 以下除外都是从事捕鱼的船舶 当在航道中航行时，你应保持在 假如没有采取紧急措施，两船可能碰撞 地球上任意两点的最短距离定义为

当浮筒标记航道的分叉点时，推荐航道不说明为单号或双号 在站点附近可能有海图上未注明的灯，雾号和雷达信标发射器

洋流流向由不同的海水密度，地球的旋转和主要的大气环流引起的‗

所有准备装载谷物的货舱必须开始装货被清洁 立即停止吊杆，鹅颈头弯曲‗ 实际的装货重量依赖于实际的亏舱量

目的旨在减少碰撞事故的航线设计制度被称为

当进入驾驶台，苏威士运河引航员要求船长填写 当风力达到目10~11级时，我们通常称它为

关于单螺旋桨船，在主机时横向力对船的影响最大 多普勒测速仪工作在绝对示速工况模式显示

当你开启雷达在浓雾中航行，你应 你的雷达设为真运动显示模式。以下哪一个在平面位臵显示器范围内将不出现移动？

当雷达波遇到硬质物体如船舶或飞机时，雷达波将发射来的反射回去‗ 在适当的量程上，小船，冰和其他漂浮的物体有可能不被雷达到的可能性

58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. . 65. 66. 67. 68.

本航次自上海装货8000吨后开始并在卸货后结束 假如当你使用国际信号码在无线电话上收到RPT时，你应 你自己正在使用自动绞缆机，如果当绳子伸进绞缆筒的时候你陷入缆绳的轮子上，你可能被拖进绞缆机并且被伤到或者杀死 倒缆带的缆绳

卤化物灭火器的检验包括检查软管，手柄，喷嘴和灭火器称重 救生艇上空气箱的作用是当进水的时候保持浮起 这是一个演习区域。航行者被谨慎驾驶

中华人民共和国海事局

2006年第2期海船船员适任证书全国统考试题（总第40期）

科目：航海英语 试卷代号：903 适用对象：无限航区、近洋航区二/三副

(本试卷卷面总分100分，及格分为70分，考试时间100分钟)

答题说明：请选择一个最合适的答案，并将该答案按答题卡要求，在相应位置上用2B铅笔涂黑．

第1题至68题，每题1分，第69题至76题，每题1.5分，第77题至81题每题4分．

一．单项选择题

1． You ______ in the wrong position obstructing other traffic．You must heave up your anchor．

A．have anchored B．have placed your anchor

C．have moored your anchor D．have maintained your anchor 2． The strongest of the natural fiber ropes is______．

A．Nylon B．Dacron C．Manila D．Sisal 3． On this chart only the principle ______ to navigation are shown．

A．equipment's B．tools C．apparatus D．aids 4． The ship can leave the port ______ the joint inspection．

A．before B．after C．at D．from

5． They ______ in the Engine Room in spite of the extremely difficult conditions．

A．carried out B．carried on C．carried off D．carried forward 6． You are kindly ______ to issue the landing permits to the crew．

A．request B．requesting C．requested D．be request 7． Aircraft made forced ______ near position 23 o 32'N，110 o 13'E．

A．striking B．landing C．grounding D．stranding

8． A DECK，SPACE，AREA，ETC.，NOT PERMITTED TO BE ENTERED FOR SAFETY

REASONS defines ______． A．Restricted area B．Closed area C．Prohibited place D．Forbidden place 9． The following ______ is a standard phrase．

A．You may enter fairway B．You should enter fairway C．ANSWER．It is permitted to enter fairway D．You could enter fairway

10．Strips of timber fixed to the frames of a ship, either in a horizontal or vertical direction, which

keep cargo away from the sides of the ship, assisting ventilation and helping protect against

a build-up of moisture or condensation are termed as _______．

A．frames B．shell plates C．bilge plates D．cargo batten 11．Which of the following best indicates how many tons of cargo a ship can carry？

A．Bale cubic B．Deadweight C．Gross tonnage D．Net tonnage 12．______refers to the angle between true north and the heading line of the vessel.

A．True position B．True meridian C．True course D．True bearing 13．A sheave is a ______．

A．grooved wheel in a block B．line to hold a lifeboat next to the embarkation deck C．partial load of grain D．seaman's knife

14．The wire ropes and blocks，or pulleys，on a ship are called ______．

A．the apparatus B．equipment C．riggings D．fittings 15．All vessel personnel should be familiar with the survival craft's ______.

A. boarding and operating procedures B. maintenance schedule C. navigational systems D. fuel consumption rates 16．If a fire-fighting situation calls for low-velocity fog you would ______．

A．order the engine room to reduce pressure on the fire pump B．put the lever on an all-purpose fire nozzle all the way forward C．attach a low-velocity fog applicator with the nozzle shut down D．put the lever on an all-purpose fire nozzle all the way back

17．A fire has broken out on the stern of your vessel．You should maneuver your vessel so the wind

______．

A．blows the fire back toward the vessel B．comes over the bow C．comes over the stern D．comes over either beam 18．A person who sees someone fall overboard should first ______.

A. call for help and keep the individual in sight

B. run to the radio room to send an emergency message C. immediately jump in the water to assist the individual D. go to the bridge to report captain 19．Keeping the draft at or below the load line mark will insure that the vessel has adequate ______．

A．ballast B．reserve buoyancy C．displacement D．rolling periods 20．How should you signal the crane operator to lower the boom?

A．With arm extended and fingers closed，point thumb downward B．With arm extended downwards and forefinger pointing down，move hand in small horizontal circles C．Extend arm with the palm down，and hold this position rigidly D．With hands clasped in front of your body

21．How many dry-powder extinguishers has your ship exactly been ______．

A．produced B．provided with C．supplied by D．met with

22．All the cargo holds must be ______ cleaned out ______ meet the requirement of the cargo

surveyor．

A．such／that B．so／that C．such／to D．so／as to

23．Placing a lashing across a hook to prevent a fitting from slipping out of the hook is called

______．

A．faking B．flemishing down C．mousing D．worming

24．As oil pipe line connections were broken，______ quantity of oil was caused to spill onto the

wharf and into the dock water．

A．a not knowing B．an unknowing C．an unknown D．a not known 25．The man directing and supervising the work of stevedores is the ______．

A．local agent B．watchman C．docker D．foreman

26．All of the following records are usually maintained by the watch-standing officers aboard a vessel

EXCEPT the ______．

A．deck logbook B．official logbook C．compass record book D．chronometer error book

27．In writing up the log book at the end of your watch，you make an error．which of the following

is the way to correct the error？

A．Carefully and neatly erase the entry and rewrite it correctly

B．Remove this page of the log book and rewrite all entries on a clean page C．Blot out the error completely and rewrite the entry correctly

D．Cross out the error with a single line and rewrite the entry correctly

28．A buoy having red and green horizontal bands would have a light characteristic of ______．

A．group occulting B．composite group flashing C．Morse letter A D．quick flashing

29．You‘d better ______ your course to port to avoid collision．

A．to alter B．alter C．altering D．altered

30．Good anchorage may be obtained anywhere，generally mud and sand，in this water area．Vessel

may have ______．

A．good towing ground B．good holding ground C．good grabbing ground D．good dragging ground 31．A check rope is ______．

A．a safety line attached to a man working over the side B．used to measure water depth

C．used to slow the headway of a barge

D．used to measure the overhead height of a bridge

32．The approach to the roads and harbor from the ______ entails no difficulty．

A．eastern B．easterly C．eastward D．eastwards 33．The ship is not very stable，please ______ when making a turn．

A．stop down B．speed down C．slow down D．down slow 34．Pitching is angular motion of the vessel about what axis?

A．Longitudinal B．Transverse C．Vertical D．Centerline 35．Owing to the big draught of the ship，she has to get alongside by the time of ______．

A．spring tide B．flood tide C．ebb tide D．slack water 36．The engine ______ smoke and steam．

A．gives up B．gives away C．gives in D．gives off

37．Sometimes a tropical storm moves so slowly that a vessel，if astern of it，can ______ it．

A．go ahead B．approach C．proceed near D．run into 38．A frontal thunderstorm is caused by ______．

A．pronounced local heating B．wind being pushed up a mountain

C．a warm air mass rising over a cold air mass

D．an increased lapse rate caused by advection of warm surface air 39．Good weather is usually associated with a region of ______．

A．low barometric pressure B．high barometric pressure C．falling barometric pressure D．pumping barometric pressure 40．An air mass is termed warm if ______．

A．it is above 70° F

B．the ground over which it moves is cooler than the air C．it originated in a high pressure area D．it originated in a low pressure area

41．BASHI：E TO SE 9-10．500M IN HVY SQUALLY SHWRS AND TS．SEA 8-9M．SWELL

SE 6-7．From the above forecast，the wind in Beaufort Scale will be ______． A．STRONG GALE TO STORM B．GALE TO STRONG GALE

C．NEAR GALE TO GALE D．STRONG BREEZE TO NEAR GALE 42．MAINLY GOOD BECOMING MODERATE．This forecast probably refers to ______ in a

certain area．

A．visibility B．winds C．sea D．fog

43．A shipper of cargo aboard your vessel offers a letter of indemnity for the cargo．This is done in

order to obtain a(n) ______．

A．Clean Bill of Lading B．Order Bill of Lading C．Straight Bill of Lading D．Through Bill of Lading 44．Bearings are true reckoned ______ in Admiralty Charts．

A．clockwise from 000 to 359 degrees B．clockwise from 359 to 000 degrees C．anti-clockwise from 000 to 359 degrees D．anti-clockwise from 359 to 000 degrees 45．Admiralty Notices to Mariners，containing important information for the mariners and enabling

them to keep their charts and books corrected for the latest information，are issued daily and published in ______．

A．Weekly Editions B．Quarterly Editions C．Annual Editions D．Monthly Editions

46．Lines on a chart which connect points of equal magnetic variation are called ______．

A．magnetic latitudes B．magnetic declinations C．dip D．isogonic lines 47．Mean high water is the average height of ______．

A．the higher high waters B．the lower high waters C．the lower of the two daily tides D．all high waters

48．______ amplify charted detail and contain information needed for safe navigation．

A．Admiralty Sailing Directions B．Admiralty List of Lights

C．Admiralty List of Signals D．Admiralty Notices to Mariners

49．Ocean Passages for the World and Routeing Charts should be ______ for trans-oceanic

information．

A．looked B．consulted C．seen D．reviewed 50．How is variation indicated on a small-scale nautical chart?

A．Magnetic compass table B．Magnetic meridians

C．Isogonic lines D．Variation is not indicated on small-scale nautical charts 51．A cardinal mark showing an uninterrupted quick-flashing white light indicates the deepest water

in the area is on the ______．

A．north side of the mark B．west side of the mark C．east side of the mark D．south side of the mark 52．How would you pass a red buoy in the maritime buoyage system ―A‖?

A．keep the buoy on the vessel‘s starboard side when approaching a port and on the vessel‘s port side when leaving．

B．keep the buoy on the vessel‘s port side when approaching a port and on the vessel‘s starboard side when leaving．

C．keep the buoy on the vessel‘s starboard side when approaching a port and on the vessel‘s starboard side when leaving．

D．keep the buoy on the vessel‘s port side when approaching a port and on the vessel‘s port side when leaving 53．Charted depth is the ______．

A．vertical distance from the tidal datum to the ocean bottom plus the height of the tide B．vertical distance from the tidal datum to the ocean bottom C．average height of water over a specified period of time D．average height of all low waters at a place

54．You may find the time of slack water after low water in a certain port from ______．

A．Deadweight Scale B．Tide Tables C．Notices to Mariners D．Table of Azimuth 55．Which of the following statement is correct regarding ship handling when in the vicinity of traffic

separation schemes？______．(1)A vessel shall，so far as practicable，avoid crossing traffic lanes (2)If obliged to cross traffic lanes，she shall do so as nearly as practicable at right angles to the general direction of traffic flow．

A．(1) only B．(2) only C．Both(1) and (2) D．Neither (1) nor (2) 56．On no account can they cut it ______ it be fouled．

A．would B．shall C．should D．do

57．It may be found that，in certain circumstances，Radar Beacon can cause unwanted interference

particularly ______． A．at close range B．at end on situation C．at head on situation D．at crossing situation 58．Before sailing，mariners on duty shall check the headings of magnetic compass by comparison

with ______． A．ship's clock B．engine movement recorder C．repeaters D．navigation lights 59．The radio waves used for radar are very short，only ______ long．

A．a few centimeters B．a few fathoms C．a few meters D．a few feet 60．Your radar is set on a true motion display．Which of the following will NOT appear to move

across the PPI scope? A．Echoes from a buoy B．Own ship's marker

C．Echo from a ship on the same course at the same speed D．Echo from a ship on a reciprocal course at the same speed

61．The system will accept a harbor map which is incorrect，therefore the operator must exercise caution in harbor selection．

A．be considered B．be prudent C．be bold enough D．be carelessness 62．Calibration Stations give special transmissions for the calibration of ship's ______．

A．gyro-compass B．marine radar C．DF D．navigational satellite 63．To obtain accuracy in fixing by DF，______ and three stations should be used．

A．parallel bearings B．long-range bearings C．short-range bearings D．cross bearings ．A compass card without north-seeking capability that is used for relative bearings is a(n) ______．

A．bearing circle B．pelorus C．bearing bar D．alidade

65．Before switching on gyro-compass，you should make sure that the power supply on board is

______．

A．high or low B．AC or DC C．strong or weak D．on or off 66．What is a requirement for any action taken to avoid collision?

A．When in sight of another vessel，any action taken must be accompanied by sound signals B．The action taken must include changing the speed of the vessel C．The action must be positive and made in ample time D．All of the above

67．When two power-driven vessels are crossing，which vessel is the stand-on vessel?

A．The vessel which is to starboard of the other vessel B．The vessel which is to port of the other vessel C．The larger vessel

D．The vessel that sounds the first whistle signal

68．The rules require that a stand-on vessel SHALL take action to avoid collision when she

determines that ______． A．risk of collision exists

B．the other vessel will cross ahead of her

C．the other vessel is not taking appropriate action

D．collision cannot be avoided by the give-way vessel's maneuver alone

二．关联题（每组关联题题干下有4个小题，每小题4个选项）

第一组：

Merchant ships are designed to carry cargo．Some are also designed to carry passengers．They can operate as liners．These are employed on regular routes on a fixed timetable．A list of their arrival and departure dates is published in advance and they sail whether full or not．Liners can be classed as either deep-sea liners or short-sea liners．The former carry mainly containerized cargo across the oceans of the world; the later carry containerized or conventional cargo on shorter routes．Ferries are also classed as liners．These offer a daily or weekly service for passengers and vehicles across channels and narrow seas．A few ships are still employed as passenger liners．They not only carry passengers but also some cargo on routes from Europe to North America and to the Far East．Nowadays the passenger trade is very small and passenger liners usually operate as cruise ships for part of the year．

69．The deep-sea liners _______．

A．carry mainly containerized cargo B．carry mainly conventional cargo

C．offer a daily or weekly service for passengers and vehicles D．sail across channels and narrow seas 70．The Liners _______．

A．always sail full B．sail regularly even not full C．always sail in ballast D．will not sail if not full 71．A list of the arrival and departure dates of liners _______．

A．will be published weekly

B．will be published when they sail, whether full or not, from Europe to North America and to

the Far East C．will not be published even they sail fully loaded D．is published prior to their departure 72．It is implied in the passage that _______．

A．the number of passenger ships is small

B．all passenger ships will carry some cargo in near future C．it is not necessary for liners to sail in regular time D．container carriers should carry some passengers

第二组：

The axial thrust of the propeller is the force working in a fore and aft direction．This force causes the ship to move ahead through the water or to go astern．Because of her shape, a ship will move ahead through the water more easily than going astern．

The transverse thrust is the sideways force of the propeller as it rotates．The transverse effect of the propeller blades at the top near the surface of the water is not strong enough to counteract the opposite effect of the lower blades．For right-handed propellers this cants the ship's stern to starboard and her bow to port, when the ship is going ahead．The effect is small and can be corrected by the rudder．When the engines are put astern, the effect is the opposite and the stern cants to port．This effect is stronger and cannot easily be corrected．Vessels with left-handed propellers behave in the opposite way.

73．The force that causes the ship to move ahead through the water or to go astern is known as_______．

A．axial thrust

B．transverse thrust

C．the transverse effect of the propeller blades at the top near the surface of the water D．the transverse effect of the lower blades of the propeller near the bottom of the water 74．A left-handed propellers, when the ship is going ahead, will cant ship‘s stern to_______．

A．starboard B．port C．to move ahead D．move astern 75．The transverse thrust of the propeller is stronger when the ship is_______．

A．going a stern B．going ahead

C．stopped D．making no way through the water 76．The transverse thrust of the propeller can mainly be overcome by _______．

A．the rudder B．the propeller itself C．the nautical instrument D．wind and tide

三．中译英（共5题，请将答案写在答题纸上）

77．锚离底, 降下锚球, 在引航员的指挥下驶往泊位，大副和木匠在船首了头。（航海日志） 78．理货长来船, 核对昨日卸货数量, 无异议。（航海日志）

79．开航前试验驾驶台控制系统和操舵设备，情况正常。（航海日志） 80．三副应负责保证所有消防设备处于随时可用状态。 81．我船准备在明天下午14：00举行救生演习。 题号--答案 1--A 6--C 11--B 16--C 21--B 26--B 31--C 36--D 41--A 46--D 51--A 56--C 61--B 66--C 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31.

题号--答案 2--C 7--B 12--C 17--B 22--D 27--D 32--C 37--D 42--A 47--D 52--A 57--A 62--C 67--A 题号--答案 3--D 8--A 13--A 18--A 23--C 28--B 33--C 38--C 43--A 48--A 53--B 58--C 63--D 68--D 题号--答案 4--B 9--C 14--C 19--B 24--C 29--B 34--B 39--B 44--A 49--B 54--B 59--A --D 69--ABDA 题号--答案 5--B 10--D 15--A 20--A 25--D 30--B 35--A 40--B 45--A 50--C 55--C 60--A 65--B 70--ABAA 你在不适当的地方影响他船的航行。你必须起锚 强度最大的天然纤维绳是 在这张海图上只有对航行重要的助航设施被展示 联合检查以后船舶可以离开港口 他们在机舱无论条件非常的困难 请你颁发登陆证给船员 航空器成功的在123.32N, 10.13E位臵附近

为安全理由，不允许进入的甲板，舱室，区域等定义为 以下是标准用语

以下哪一项最能说明船上装载多少货物？ 指的是真北与船舶船首线之间的夹角 槽轮是 在船上钢丝绳，滑轮，或滑车叫 所有在船人员均应熟悉救生艇(筏)的 假如灭火情形要求低压水雾，你将 你船船尾爆发火灾。你应操船使风 看见有人落水应

保持吃水在或在载重线以下将确保船舶具有适当的 你应怎样指挥起货机手落放吊杆? 你船准确地多少干粉灭火器 所有货舱必须被清洁的干净符合货物检验员的要求 穿越钓钩口放臵绑索以防止属具滑落钓钩称为

指导和监督码头工人工作的人是 以下除外的记录通常由在船的值班驾驶员维护 在你值班末了填写航海日记时记入了一个错误。以下哪一项纠正这个错误的方法？用单线划去错误的记录并写上正确的

具有红绿横纹的浮筒将具有组合闪光的灯光特性 你最好向左你的航向以避免碰撞。（You‘d better + 动词原型

无论何处可能获得好锚地，通常是泥和沙，在这些水域船舶可以拥有 （驳船）止荡线被用于减缓驳船前进时的偏荡

32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. . 65. 66. 67. 68.

自东面接近锚地和港口必然没有困难 船舶不是非常稳定，请在旋回时 纵摇是船体对于哪一个轴的角运动？ 由于船舶的大吃水，她靠泊必须在 机器烟雾和蒸汽‗

虽然有时热带风暴移动得比船缓慢，但如果它在船之后，则可能陷入其中 锋前雷暴是由引起的‗ 好天气通常伴随着

气团被称为暖式假如在其移动下方的地面比它冷

Bashi：东到东南风9到10级。在大暴雨和TS时能见度500米。浪高8到9米。涌东南向6到7级。从以上的预报中，在Beaufort风力表中将是 大部分地区好转中.这预报指的是指定区域的 将货物装到你船上的托运人为货物提供一份保函。这样做的目的是为了获得清洁提单 在英版海图中，方位被正确计算 英版航海通告，对于海员来说包含重要的信息并使他们能够保持其海图和图书改正到最新，它们每日发布并以出版

在海图上的相等磁差点连接起来的线叫做 平均高潮是的平均值

增加海图制图的细节和包含航行安全所需的信息

大洋信息应世界大洋航路和航路设计图 在小比例尺海图上磁差如何表示？

一方位标志显示连续的快速闪白光表示区域中的最深点是在

海图标注水深是 在一个特定的港口，你可以在中找到低潮后的平流时刻 关于船舶在分道通航制附近水域操纵，以下哪个陈述正确？

在一定的环境下，可能会发现雷达信标的发射导致有害的干扰，特别时 在开航之前，值班驾驶员应核对比较磁罗经艏向和 雷达使用的雷达波波长非常短，只有长 你的雷达设为真运动显示模式。以下哪一个在平面位臵显示器范围内将不出现移动？

系统将认可一个不正确的港口地图，因此操作者在港口的选择上必须 校准场为船舶的校准提供特殊的发射信号 为通过测向仪获得精确的船位，应使用和三个发射站 被用于相对方位且没有寻北能力的罗经卡叫做 在开动电罗经之前，你应确保船上的电源正常‗‗ 对于避免碰撞而采取的任何行动的要求是什么？ 当两艘机动船交叉相遇，哪一艘是直航船？ 规则要求直航船当她确定时应采取行动一避免碰撞

中华人民共和国海事局

2006年第1期海船船员适任证书全国统考试题（总第39期）

科目：航海英语 试卷代号：903 适用对象：无限航区、近洋航区二/三副

(本试卷卷面总分100分，及格分为70分，考试时间100分钟)

答题说明：请选择一个最合适的答案，并将该答案按答题卡要求，在相应位置上用2B铅笔涂黑．

第1题至68题，每题1分，第69题至76题，每题1.5分，第77题至81题每题4分．

一．单项选择题

1． In order to pay out or slack a mooring line which is under strain，you should ______．

A．sluice the line B．surge the line C．stopper the line D．slip the line

2． It takes about 12 seconds to reverse ______ full speed ahead ______ full speed astern．

A．at，to B．to，from C．from，to D．at，from

3． El Abbasa (Sweet Water) Canal ______ from River Nile at Cairo to Suez Canal at Ismailia．

A．extend B．extending C．extends D．are extending 4． An accident came ______ my mind when I saw the broken case．

A．in B．on C．to D．with

5． The stevedores have already stowed the porcelain ware ______ up to the deckhead．

A．loosely B．closely C．heavily D．strongly 6． My ship sailed ______ port of Shanghai，bound ______ Rotterdam．

A．from，for B．for，on C．on，at D．at，from

7． A VESSEL，OTHER THAN A RESCUE UNIT，DESIGNATED TO CO-ORDINATE

SURFACE SEARCH AND RESCUE OPERATION WITHIN A SPECIFIED AREA is known as ______．

A．salving vessel B．Co-ordinator surface search C．MERSAR D．the vessel being salved

8． AN APPOINTMENT BETWEEN VESSELS NORMALLY MADE ON RADIO TO MEET

IN A CERTAIN AREA OR POSITION defines ______．

A．Bona fide B．Rendez-vous C．Prima facie D．Action in personam 9． A DECK，SPACE，AREA，ETC.，NOT PERMITTED TO BE ENTERED FOR SAFETY

REASONS defines ______．

A．Restricted area B．Closed area C．Prohibited place D．Forbidden place 10．Strips of timber fixed to the frames of a ship, either in a horizontal or vertical direction, which

keep cargo away from the sides of the ship, assisting ventilation and helping protect against a build-up of moisture or condensation are termed as ______．

A．frames B．shell plates C．bilge plates D．cargo batten 11．Molded depth is measured from the ______．

A．inside of the shell B．outside of the shell

C．top of the center vertical keel D．top of the garboard stake 12．Manila lines in which the strands are right-hand laid ______．

A．should be coiled in a clockwise direction

B．should be coiled in a counterclockwise direction C．may be coiled either clockwise or counterclockwise D．should never be coiled

13．A hygrometer is a device used for determining ______．

A．the absolute temperature B．atmospheric pressure C．wind velocity D．relative humidity 14．My ship is equipped ______ automatic hatch covers．

A．with B．by C．on D．in 15．What is the minimum period of time that the air supply for a self-contained breathing apparatus is

required to last? A．10 minutes B．20 minutes C．30 minutes D．90 minutes 16．Aboard a survival craft，ether can be used to ______．

A．start the engine in cold weather B．aid in helping personnel breathe C．prime the sprinkler system D．prime the air supply

17．You notice smoke coming from an open laundry room doorway．After activating the fire alarm,

which of the following would you do FIRST? A．Attempt to determine what is burning． B．Acquire the nearest life jacket. C．Break out the nearest fire hose.

D．Wait for the fire team to arrive and assist as directed.

18．If the survival craft is not loaded to full capacity，the personnel should be ______．

A．loaded more on the port side forward

B．loaded equally on both sides with more forward C．loaded equally on both sides with more aft D．allowed to sit anywhere

19．Keeping the draft at or below the load line mark will insure that the vessel has adequate ______．

A．ballast B．reserve buoyancy C．displacement D．rolling periods 20．The two most effective generating forces of surface ocean currents are ______．

A．temperature and salinity differences in the water B．wind and density differences in the water C．water depth and underwater topography

D．rotation of the Earth and continental interference

21．GM cannot be used as an indicator of stability at all angles of inclination because ______．

A．M is not fixed at large angles B．there is no M at large angles C．G is not fixed at large angles D．there is no G at large angles

22．The distance between the surface of the water and the tidal datum is the _______．

A．height of tide B．charted depth C． actual water depth D． range of tide

23．Galvanizing would be suitable for protecting wire rope which is used for ______．

A．cargo runners B．stays C．topping lifts D．All of the above

24．You notice oil on the water near your vessel while taking on fuel．You should FIRST ______．

A．stop fueling B．notify the senior deck officer

C．notify the terminal superintendent D．determine whether your vessel is the source 25．For cargoes ______ grain meals，coal，ventilation is needed to prevent them ______ spontaneous

combustion． A．i．e．／of B．for instance／away C．for example／off D．such as／from 26．When visibility is 10 nautical miles，we say that visibility is ______．

A．very good B．good C．poor D．moderate

27．In writing up the log book at the end of your watch，you make an error．which of the following

is the way to correct the error？______．

A．Carefully and neatly erase the entry and rewrite it correctly

B．Remove this page of the log book and rewrite all entries on a clean page C．Blot out the error completely and rewrite the entry correctly

D．Cross out the error with a single line and rewrite the entry correctly

28．There is not ______ depth of water around the area centered at the lighthouse．

A．ample B．sufficient C．enormous D．incredible 29．We ______ at anchor in the roadstead till the evening．

A．have to ride B．have to get C．have to put D．have to make

30．It is sometimes necessary to moor bow and stern to two mooring buoys in order to ______．

A．avoid any swing in a restricted space B．shelter the ship from strong winds

C．prevent to touch with other vessels D．make a convenience of cargo discharging 31．Good anchorage may be obtained anywhere，generally mud and sand，in this water area．Vessel

may have ______．

A．good towing ground B．good holding ground C．good grabbing ground D．good dragging ground 32．The pilot said he ______ our vessel directly to the berth．

A．will take B．took C．is taking D．would take

33．Especially in adverse weather，risk of collision with an offshore supply vessel increases when the

vessel is moored to what side of the unit? ______．

A．Upwind B．Downwind C．Crosswind D．Downcurrent 34．Pilot ladder is ______ on port side．

A．equipped B．rigged C．put on D．put off 35．The fishing boat upset and sank to the ______ of the sea．

A．base B．under part C．bottom D．down place 36．When within the entrance，the vessel should ______ Surf islet．

A．navigate B．arrive at C．steer for D．maneuver for

37．For full information regarding the current circulation of the Indian Ocean， ______ Sailing

Direction，Current Atlas，etc．

A．watch B．look for C．see D．regard

38．When force of winds reaches 10-11 in Beaufort scale，we usually call such wind ______．

A．Gale B．Storm C．Hurricane D．Typhoon 39．This notice will ______ you of the problem．

A．use to remind B．use to tell C．serve to remind D．be served to talk 40．By plotting the analysis messages on weather charts，we are able to ______．

A．prevent any possible accident at sea

B．prepare a reasonable forecast of the wind and weather C．help the mariner to fix a accurate ship's position D．aid the salvage of a ship in peril

41．It is predicted that heavy rains are ______ to flood the harbor and its vicinity in a few days．

A．frightening B．threatening C．scattering D．warning

42．Wind direction may be determined by observing all of the following EXCEPT ______．

A．low clouds B．waves C．whitecaps D．swells 43．Bearings are true reckoned ______ in Admiralty Charts．

A．clockwise from 000 to 359 degrees B．clockwise from 359 to 000 degrees C．anti-clockwise from 000 to 359 degrees D．anti-clockwise from 359 to 000 degrees 44．Admiralty Notices to Mariners，containing important information for the mariners and enabling

them to keep their charts and books corrected for the latest information，are issued daily and published in ______． A．Weekly Editions B．Quarterly Editions C．Annual Editions D．Monthly Editions 45．A line connecting all possible positions of your vessel at any given time is a ______．

A．longitude line B．isogonic lines C．latitude line D．line of position 46．Mean high water is the average height of ______．

A．the higher high waters B．the lower high waters C．the lower of the two daily tides D．all high waters

47．On a chart，the characteristic of the light on a lighthouse is shown as flashing white with a red

sector．The red sector ______．

A．indicates the limits of the navigable channel B．indicates a danger area

C．is used to identify the characteristics of the light D．serves no significant purpose 48．Attention is ______ the advice on the use of charts in The Mariner's Handbook Chapter 3，

Section 1．

A．fixed to B．needed for C．pushed to D．drawn to 49．Navigational charts are subject to frequent changes，the important ones of which are promulgated

by ______．

A．Admiralty Notices to Mariners B．Mariner's Handbook C．Catalogue D．Sailing Directions

50．Which statement is true of the Uniform Lateral System of Buoyage？

A．It employs top marks

B．Lighted buoys have the same shape as unlighted buoys C．The numbering or lettering of fairway buoys is optional D．All of the above

51．Chart legends which indicate a conspicuous landmark are printed in ______．

A．capital letters B．italics C．boldface print D．underlined letters 52．A weather forecast states that the wind will commence backing．In the Northern Hemisphere(北

半球), this would indicate that it will ______．

A．shift in a clockwise manner B．decrease in velocity

C．continue blowing from the same direction D．shift in a counterclockwise manner 53．The issue of Notices to Mariners of charts and these aids(Radar beacons)may be delayed until

such time as they are assessed to be ______．

A．temporary B．permanent C．occasional D．steady

54．______ chart 3994，positions read from this chart should be shifted 0．03 minutes Northward．

A．To consider B．To check C．To examine D．To agree with 55．The Pilotage-quarantine anchorage， ______ between Damen Dao and Qingshan Dao，is defined

by the lines ______ the given points．

A．situated／connected B．situated／connecting C．situating／connected D．situating／connecting 56．On no account can they cut it _______ it be fouled．

A．would B．shall C．should D．do 57．A vessel's position should be plotted using bearings of ______．

A．fixed objects on shore B．buoys at a distance C．buoys close by D．All of the above

58．In order to insure that the racon signal is visible on your 3 cm radar，the ______．

A．10 cm radar should be placed on standby or turned off B．gain control should be turned to maximum C．radar should be stabilized，head up

D．rain clutter control should be off but，if necessary，may be on low 59．You have another ship overtaking you close aboard to starboard．You have 3 radar targets bearing

090° relative at ranges of 0.5 mile，1 mile，and 1.5 miles．In this case，the unwanted echoes are called ______．

A．multiple echoes B．spoking C．indirect echoes D．side-lobe echoes 60．______ 20 targets can be tracked at one time．When maximum tracking capacity is reached，no

further acquisitions(捕获) are possible．

A．As many as B．So many as C．As much as D．As more as 61．The system will accept a harbor map which is incorrect，therefore the operator must exercise caution in harbor selection．

A．be considered B．be prudent C．be bold enough D．be carelessness 62．Defense plans may cause the operation of electronic aids to navigation to be suspended with

______．

A．no notice B．one day's notice C．a week's notice D．thirty days notice 63．A correction for augmentation is included in the Nautical Almanac corrections for ______．

A．the Sun B．the Moon C．Venus D．None of the above ．Magnetic heading differs from compass heading by_______．

A．compass error B．true heading C．variation D．deviation 65．Deviation is caused by ______．

A．changes in the earth's magnetic field

B．nearby magnetic land masses or mineral deposits C．magnetic influence inherent to that particular vessel

D．the magnetic lines of force not coinciding with the lines of longitude

66．Your vessel is at anchor in fog while in international waters． The fog signal of another vessel，

apparently underway，has been steadily growing louder and the danger of collision appears to exist．In addition to the normal fog signal，what signal may be used to indicate the presence of your vessel？______．

A．The danger signal； five or more short and rapid blasts on the whistle B．Three blasts on the whistle； one short，one prolonged and one short C．Three blasts on the whistle； one prolonged followed by two short D．No special signal other than the normal fog signal 67．A vessel trawling would display ______．

A．a black ball B．a basket C．a double cone，point to point D．none of the above 68．Sailing vessels are stand-on over power-driven vessels except ______．

A．in a crossing situation B．in a meeting situation

C．when they are the overtaking vessel D．on the inland waters of the PR China

二．关联题（每组关联题题干下有4个小题，每小题4个选项）

第一组：

Marine Forecast Issued for Southeastern Grand Banks 0330 PM NST on Mon 19 Dec 2005 Synopsis:

A ridge of high pressure south of the district will drift NW to lie just S of Newfoundland Tue

morning. Mod to strong W to SW winds north of the ridge become light to mod in its vicinity. On Tue a low pressure system will move SE of the marine district. Mod to strong easterlies ahead of the low back to strong northwesterlies later in the day in its wake.

Marine interests are advised that freezing spray warnings are continued for Belle Isle. Forecast:

Winds SW 15 knots backing to SE 15 to 20 this evening then increasing to NE 20 to 30 Tue morning. Winds backing to NW 20 to 30 Tue afternoon. Occasional showers changing to rain overnight then tapering to occasional showers Tue afternoon. Vis fair in precipitation. Little temperature change. Outlook for Wed mod to strong southerlies diminishing to light winds.

69．The ridge and the low are moving ______． A．in some direction

B．in opposite direction

C．to SE and NW respectively D．too fast in the day that marine interests are advised that freezing spray warnings are continued

for Belle Isle 70．At noontime Tue the wind direction will be______．

A．S B．NE C．NW D．SW 71．It is forecast for Wed that there will be ______．

A．winds NE 20 to 30 knots

B．winds SW 15 knots backing to SE 15 to 20

C．winds NW 20 to 30 knots with occasional showers D．mod to strong S winds diminishing to light winds 72．On Tue afternoon, there will be ______．

A．rain B．fog C．blue skies D．showers

第二组：

Corrections to sailing Directions are given in Section Ⅳ.Those in force at the end of the year are reprinted in the Annual Summary of Notices to Mariners .A list of corrections in force is published in SectionⅣ of the Weekly Edition for the last week of each month.

It is recommended that corrections be kept in a file with the latest list of corrections in force on top．The list should be consulted when using the parent book to see if any corrections affecting the area under consideration are in force.

It is not recommended that corrections be stuck in the parent book or current supplement, but ,if this is done, when a new supplement is received care must be taken to retain those corrections issued after the date of the new supplement, which may be several months before its receipt on board.

73．______ are reprinted in the Annual Summary of Notices to Mariners.

A．The Sailing Directions

B．The corrections to Sailing Directions

C．The effective corrections to Notices to Mariners D．The Weekly Edition

74．The parent book is ______．

A．The Sailing Direction

B．The corrections to Sailing Directions in force C．The Annual Summary of Notices to Mariners D．The Weekly Edition

75．It is recommended that corrections to the Sailing Directions be______．

A．made by hand

B．consulted at the last week of each month

C．stuck in the parent book or current supplement

D．kept in a file with the latest list of corrections in force on top

76．If the corrections be stuck in the parent book or current supplement, ______．

A．when a new supplement is received, those corrections issued after the date of the new

supplement must be retained

B．the parent book must be consulted

C．the current supplement must be consulted

D．the Annual Summary of Notices to Mariners must be used

三．中译英（共5题，请将答案写在答题纸上）

77．应急消防泵、救生艇及其释放装置的缺陷经常引起船舶的滞留。 78．我轮机舱正在进水，没有人员受伤。我不能控制进水。 79．工人和驳船到达并开始卸各舱货物。（航海日志）

80．试验舵机，车钟及汽笛，核对电罗经和船钟，一切良好。(航海日志) 81．左舷通过2号入口浮筒，引航员离船。船长引领出海。(航海日志) 题号--答案 1--B 6--A 11--A 16--A 21--A 26--B 31--B 36--C 41--B 46--D 51--A 56--C 61--B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

题号--答案 2--C 7--B 12--A 17--A 22--A 27--D 32--D 37--C 42--D 47--B 52--D 57--A 62--A 题号--答案 3--C 8--B 13--D 18--C 23--B 28--B 33--A 38--B 43--A 48--D 53--B 58--D 63--B 题号--答案 4--C 9--A 14--A 19--B 24--A 29--A 34--B 39--C 44--A 49--A 54--D 59--A --D 题号--答案 5--B 10--D 15--C 20--B 25--D 30--A 35--C 40--B 45--D 50--D 55--B 60--A 65--C 66--B 67--C 68--C 69--BBDD 70--BADA 为了松出或放松受力的系泊缆绳，你应 大约需要12秒的时间完成（主机）全速前进全速倒车的反转 EL Abbasa（甜水）运河自开罗的尼罗河到伊斯梅利亚(埃及城市)的Suez运河 当我看见打破的箱子时，事故便 工人早已将陶瓷制品装到了舱口的地方 我船上海，鹿特丹 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59.

除救助单元外，在给定区域被指定为协调海面搜救操作的船舶被称为 船舶之间通常用无线电约定会遇在一个确定的地区或位臵叫 为安全理由，不允许进入的甲板，舱室，区域等定义为

型深自船量起 右旋措拧的马尼拉绳应 湿度计是用于测量的设备 我船自动舱盖

在救生艇上，乙醚能够被用于

假如救生艇没有满载，船上的人员应 保持吃水在或在载重线以下将确保船舶具有适当的

GM值不能用于表示船舶所有倾斜角的稳性因为在大的横倾角时 水面与潮位基准面之间的距离是潮高 镀锌将适用保护用于的钢丝绳

当你在添加燃油时注意到你船的附近水面有油时。你首先应

谷糠，煤之类的货物，必须通风以它们自燃 当能见度仅有大约1海里时，我们说 在你值班末了填写航海日记时记入了一个错误。以下哪一项纠正这个错误的方法？用单线划去错误的记录并写上正确的 以灯塔为中心的周围区域没有水深 我们在锚地直到晚上‘ 为了有时有必要船首尾系两个浮筒

无论何处可能获得好锚地，通常是泥和沙，在这些水域船舶可以拥有 引航员说他将直接操船靠泊 特别在恶劣的天气中，当船舶被系泊在近岸供应船的一舷时，则与其碰撞危险将增加

引水梯被安放在左舷 渔船倾覆并沉入 当在进口里面时，船舶应冲浪到 对于有关印度洋环流的全部信息，航路指南，洋流图集等 当风力达到目10~11级时，我们通常称它为 这个通知将那个问题。 对于气象传真图上标绘的信息，我们能够 据预报，过几天大雨泛滥淹没港口及附近地区、

在英版海图中，方位被正确计算 英版航海通告，对于海员来说包含重要的信息并使他们能够保持其海图和图书改正到最新，它们每日发布并以出版

在给定时刻你船所有可能船位的连线是位置线 平均高潮是的平均值

在海图上，灯塔的灯光特性被显示为白和红的扇区。红扇区 海员手册关于海图的使用的一些建议 航行海图主要以发布的为依据经常变化 关于统一浮标系统，哪一个陈述正确？

海图表示显著陆标的标题被打印为 气象预报中叙述的风将开始风向顺转。在北半球这表示风向将 海图和这些助航设备的航海通告发行可能被延迟直到他们被永久的确定

位于Damen岛和Qingshan岛之间的引水检疫锚地由给出的点的连线确定‗‗

船舶的位置应使用岸上已知固定物标的方位进行标绘 为了确保雷达信标信号在3厘米波雷达上可见， 有一船在你右舷近距离追越你。你有三个雷达回波在相对方位090度，距离海里0.5，1.0海里和1.5海里。在这种情况下，多余的回波叫 60. 61. 62. 63. . 65. 66.

20个物标能够被同时跟踪。当达到最大跟踪能力时，就没有进一步捕获的可能了 系统将认可一个不正确的港口地图，因此操作者在港口的选择上必须 国防演习计划可能导致电子助航设备的运作暂时关闭 (月球视半径的)改正量被包含在航海天文年历的改正量中 磁首向不同于罗经首向在于 自差是由于而引起的 你船在公海上雾中锚泊。显然在航的另一船的雾号逐渐变得响亮且存在碰撞危险。除正规的雾号外，什么信号可以被用于表示你船的存在？ 67. 一拖网渔船将显示 68. 对于机动船来说，帆船是直航船除了当它们是追越船外

中华人民共和国海事局

2005年第3期海船船员适任证书全国统考试题（总第38期）

科目：航海英语 试卷代号：903 适用对象：无限航区、近洋航区二/三副

(本试卷卷面总分100分，及格分为70分，考试时间100分钟)

答题说明：请选择一个最合适的答案，并将该答案按答题卡要求，在相应位置上用2B铅笔涂黑．

第1题至68题，每题1分，第69题至76题，每题1.5分，第77题至81题每题4分．

一．单项选择题

1． Hard right rudder means ______．

A．jam the rudder against the stops

B．meet a swing to the right，then return to amidships C．put the rudder over to the right all the way

D．put the rudder over quickly to 15 degrees right rudder

2． It is dangerous for vessels without the use of radar ______ the estuary．

A．to get B．to approach C．to proceed D．to close 3． Get searchlight ______ for transiting the canal at night．

A．on B．already C．ready D．almost 4． Go and ______ your Shipper to my cabin．

A．take B．bring C．fetch D．carry 5． Allow me to put ______ some evidence for your further consideration．

A．up B．on C．into D．forward

6． Many new ______ will be opened up at sea in the future for those with a university education．

A．opportunities B．realities C．necessities D．probabilities

7． Of the following，_______ means the sufficiency of a vessel in materials，construction，

equipment，crew，and outfit for the trade or service in which it is employed．

A．Seaworthiness B．Cargo-worthiness C．Readiness D．Proficiency 8． The following ______ is a standard phrase．

A．WARNING．You are running into danger B．You are possibly running into danger

C．You could be in the case of running into danger D．You could，I think，be running into danger 9． The following ______is a standard phrase．

A．You may enter fairway B．You should enter fairway C．ANSWER．It is permitted to enter fairway D．You could enter fairway

10．The turning circle of a vessel is the path followed by the ______.

A. center of gravity B. outermost part of the ship while making the circle

C. bow D. tipping center

11．Which of the following best indicates how many tons of cargo a ship can carry？

A．Bale cubic B．Deadweight C．Gross tonnage D．Net tonnage

12．Ships are also required to carry a(n) _______ to mitigate the effects of environmental damage in

the event of a pollution incident by ISM code and MARPOL convention. A. Oil Record Book B. Cargo Record Book

C. Muster List D. Shipboard Oil Pollution Emergency Plan 13．Foam extinguishes a fire by ______．

A．shutting off the air supply B．cooling the fuel to below ignition temperature C．dispersing(使分散) the fuel D．removing the source of ignition 14．Most propellers on merchant vessels are constructed of_____．

A．manganese bronze B．cast iron C．mild steel D．improved plow steel 15．Damage to ship‘s fittings caused by stevedore's negligence often happens．Therefore，the

stevedores ______ the cost of the damage repaired afterwards．

A．should hold responsible for B．should be held responsible for C．should be free of D．should be bearable of

16．Your vessel is equipped with totally enclosed lifeboats．Which statement is TRUE when the boat

is enveloped in flames?

A．The ventilators will automatically close by the action of fusible links B． The motor takes its air supply from outside the lifeboat to prevent asphyxiation（窒息） of the

crew C．A water spray system to cool the outside of the boat is operated by a high-volume manual

pump D．An air tank will provide about ten minutes of air for the survivors and the engine 17．A fire starts on your vessel while refueling．You should FIRST ______．

A．stop the ventilation B．sound the general alarm C．determine the source of the fire D．attempt to extinguish the fire

18．At the required fire drill conducted aboard a vessel，all persons must report to their stations and

demonstrate their ability to perform the duties assigned to them ______． A．by the tool pusher B．in the station bill

C．by the person conducting the drill D．at the previous safety meeting

19．The difference in tones between the displacement in salt water at summer load waterline and the

light weight of the vessel is ______．

A．deadweight B．gross tonnage C．net tonnage D．displacement 20．By regulation，cargo tanks must be inert before and during what operation?

A．Stripping B．Loading C．Cleaning D．Crude oil washing 21．You should do a ______ check to all of the cargo before shipment．

A．though B．through C．thorough D．thoroughly 22．Chafing gear（防摩擦装置） is used to ______．

A．anchor the boat B．pick up heavy loads

C．protect fiber rope from abrasion D．strengthen mooring lines

23．TO EVACUATE A VESSEL FROM CREW AND PASSENGERS FOLLOWING A

DISTRESS means ______． A. abandon vessel B. adrift C. beach to D. station

assembly

24．THROWING OVERBOARD OF GOODS IN ORDER TO LIGHTEN THE VESSEL OR

IMPROVE ITS STABILITY IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY defines ______．

A. Dropping off B. Jettison C. Throwing away D. Taking off 25．A safe pilot transfer operation relies on greatly the following except ______.

A. lighting at night time B. the number of the crewmembers C. lifebuoy with self-igniting light D. VHF communication with bridge 26．In radar plotting ,CPA is the abbreviation of ______．

A．closest point to approach B．close point to approach C．crossing point to approach D．coming point to approach 27．The ship ______ the Atlantic to America next week．

A．shall cross B．shall cross to C．cross D．sail cross

28．______ means the curve on the earth's surface which cuts all the meridians at the same angle．

A．Great Circle B．Position Line C．Rhumb line D．True Bearing

29．It is sometimes necessary to moor bow and stern to two mooring buoys in order to ______．

A．avoid any swing in a restricted space B．shelter the ship from strong winds

C．prevent to touch with other vessels D．make a convenience of cargo discharging 30．We ______ at anchor in the roadstead till the evening．

A．have to ride B．have to get C．have to put D．have to make 31．A vessel moored with two anchors，sometimes，at an exposed roadstead to ______．

A．aid turning the ship B．obtain a fine bearing

C．increase ship swings to wind or tide D．lighten the stress of anchor chains 32．Every ship should hoist ______ when approaching and entering ports．

A．its flashing light B．the ship's name C．its identification D．its signal letters 33．For working details ______ Admiralty list of Radio Signal

A．refer B．see C．watch D．look

34．In relation to the turning circle of a ship，the term advance means the distance ______．

A．gained at right angles to the original course B．gained in the direction of the original course

C．moved sidewise from the original course when the rudder is first put over D．around the circumference of the turning circle 35．I have steerage way．It is said that ______．

A．I am underway B．I am out of control

C．I am not making way through the water

D．I have the amount of movement forward which the ship needs to be steered properly

36．Vessels are warned ______ in the area enclosed by pecked lines owing to the existence of

numerous telegraph cables．

A．anchor B．to anchor C．not to anchor D．not to anchoring 37．Plain language is usually used on marine weather ______．

A．forecasts B．observations C．analyses D．reports 38．As the temperature of an air mass decreases，the ______．

A．absolute humidity（湿度） decreases B．relative humidity increases

C．specific humidity decreases D．dew point rises

39．In the Northern Hemisphere，gusty winds shifting clockwise，a rapid drop in temperature，

thunderstorms or rain squalls in summer (frequent rain/snow squalls in winter) then a rise in pressure followed by clearing skies，indicate the passage of a(n) ______

A．warm front B．tropical cyclone C．anticyclone D．cold front 40．A generally circular low pressure area is called a(n) ______．

A．cyclone B．anticyclone C．cold front D．occluded front 41．LOW AT 34N 135E ESLY SLWLY INTST NC．This description is most likely to be under the

heading of ______．

A．GL WNG B．GEN SYN C．STM WNG D．T Y WNG

42．MAINLY GOOD BECOMING MODERATE．This forecast probably refers to ______ in a

certain area．

A．visibility B．winds C．sea D．fog

43．A shipper of cargo aboard your vessel offers a letter of indemnity for the cargo．This is done in

order to obtain a(n) ______．

A．clean Bill of Lading B．order Bill of Lading C．straight Bill of Lading D．through Bill of Lading

44．No navigational aids are shown and chart is not kept corrected for alterations in depths inside the

pecked lines．For more detailed information，the larger scale charts must be ______． A．bought B．analyzed C．consulted D．published 45．In revised editions of Admiralty charts the ______ are corrected first．

A．smaller scales B．larger scales C．smaller scales and larger scales D．moderate scales

46．A radio medical advice service ______ ships of all nationalities and no charge is made for this

service．

A．is available to B．is available for C．are available to D．are available for 47．One of the principal dangers inherent in liquefied petroleum gas is that ______．

A．as it warms up it becomes heavier than air B．the way it reacts with sea water C．its low temperature causes frostbite or freezing D．the strong odor it produces 48．Sailing directions are kept up to date by ______．

A．publications B．notices to mariners

C．supplements D．Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners

49．All events relating to navigation，such as ship's position，speed and details of the weather，are

recorded in ______．

A. Logbook B. Bell Book C. Oil Record Book D. Compass Error Book

50．A chart has extensive corrections to be made to it. When these are made and the chart is again

printed，the chart issue is a _______.

A. first edition B. new edition C. revised edition D. reprint 51．Deviation is the angle between the ______．

A．true meridian and the axis of the compass card B．true meridian and the magnetic meridian

C．magnetic meridian and the axis of the compass card D．axis of the compass card and the degaussing meridian

52．In which voyage，between two points，is the rhumb line distance NOT approximately the same

as the great circle distance?

A. The two points are in low latitudes in the same hemisphere B. The two points are in high latitudes in the same hemisphere

C. The two points are near the equator，but in different hemispheres

D. One point is near the equator，one point is in a high latitude，and both are near the

180th meridian 53． Do not _____the watch to the relieving officer until he has verbally expressed his

acknowledgment of the information which has been passed by the officer handing over． A．turn over B．hand over C．take over D．hands off 54．Charted depth is the ______．

A. vertical distance from the tidal datum to the ocean bottom plus the height of the tide． B. vertical distance from the tidal datum to the ocean bottom C. average height of water over a specified period of time

D. average height of all low waters at a place 55．Mariners proceeding across the main routes are recommended to do so at ______．

A．as wide an angle as practicable B．as wide an angle so practicable C．like wide an angle as practicable D．like wide as angle so practicable 56．A relative bearing is always measured from ______.

A. true north B. magnetic north C. the vessel's beam D. the vessel's head 57．It may be found that，in certain circumstances，radar beacon emissions can cause ______ with the

normal radar display，particularly at close range．

A．unwanted interference B．unexpected figures C．abnormal data D．unwanted information 58．Radar display in which North is always at the top of the screen is a(n) ______．

A．unstabilized display B．stabilized display C．composition display D．relative display

59．Refer to STCW 95: Despite the duties and obligations of pilots, their presence on board does not

relieve ______in charge of the navigational watch from their duties and obligations for the safety of the ship．

A．the master B．the master or officer C．quarter master D．helmsman 60．The purpose of the voyage and passage plan is to ensure that navigation is planned in adequate

detail with contingency plans where appropriate to ensure safety navigation throughout the intended voyage from ______．

A．anchorage to anchorage B．pilot station to pilot station C．berth to berth D．berth to pilot station

61．One of the two systems established by GMDSS for the transmission and automatic receipt of

Maritime Safety Information is ______．

A．Initial Distress Alerts service B．Navigational Warning service C．INMARSAT Safety Net service D．Meteorological Warning service

62．Your vessel is equipped with a fixed CO2 system and a fire main system. In the event of an

electrical fire in the engine room what is the correct procedure for fighting the fire? A. Use the CO2 system and evacuate the engine room B. Use the fire main system and evacuate the engine room

C. Evacuate the engine room and use the CO2 system D. Evacuate the engine room and use the fire main system

63．______ is the process by which the position of the vessel at any moment is found by applying the

last well-determined position to the run that has been made since，using for this purpose the ship's course and the distance being those indicated by log． A．Dead reckoning B．Dead weight C．Dead slow ahead D．Dead slow astern ．We'll see ______ the compasses are in good condition．

A．if B．how C．when D．where

65．Your ship is steaming at night with the gyropilot engaged．You notice that the vessel's course is

slowly changing to the right．Which action should you take FIRST? A．Notify the engine room of the steering malfunction B．Change to hand steering C．Call the Master

D．Send the Quartermaster to the emergency steering station 66．A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver is one which ______．

A．through some exceptional circumstance is unable to maneuver as required by the Rules B．from the nature of her work is unable to maneuver as required by the Rules

C．due to adverse weather conditions is unable to maneuver as required by the Rules D．has lost steering and is unable to maneuver

67．If your vessel is the stand-on vessel in a crossing situation ______.

A. you must keep your course and speed

B. you may change course and speed as the other vessel must keep clear C. the other vessel must keep her course and speed D. both vessels must keep their course and speed 68． Every vessel which is directed by these Rules to keep out of the way of another vessel shall，if

the circumstances of the case admit，avoid _______.

A. crossing ahead of the other B. crossing astern of the other C. passing port to port D. passing starboard to starboard

二．关联题（每组关联题题干下有4个小题，每小题4个选项）

第一组：

While every effort is made to ensure that the data provided through the Notices to Mariners service is accurate, the user needs to be aware of the risks to corruption of data. It is important that the user should only use the data on suitable equipment and that, other applications should not be running on the user‘s machine at the same time. Users should exercise their professional judgement in the use of data, and also consult the Mariners Handbook (NP100) for further details. The user needs to be aware that there is a possibility that data could be corrupted during transmission, or in the process of display or printing on the user‘s equipment, or if converted to other software formats, and is accordingly advised that the UKHO cannot accept responsibility for any such change, or any modifications or unauthorised changes, made by licensees, or other parties.

69．The data may become corrupted in any of the following process except _______.

A. during transmission

B. in the display or printing on the user‘s equipment C. in converting to other software formats D. in air mail delivery to the readers

70．The use of the data is advised to consult _______ for further details.

A. Mariners Handbook B. Sailing Directions C. Guide to Port Entry D. Notices to Mariners

71．Of the following items _______ is not mentioned for which UKHO will accept no responsibility.

A. change in the process of display or printing

B. unauthorised changes made by licensees or other parties C. modifications made by licensees or other parties D. professional amendments． 72．It is implied that _______.

A. the data are incorrect

B. the data are to be corrected intensively

C. although the data are accurate enough, you are still advised to use it with caution

D. not to use it if you have not enough time or proper equipment to effect necessary correction

第二组：

At about 0355, the second mate ended his radio conversation and went to the chart table to write up the log. With the second mate apparently busy, the seaman on watch attempted to identify the lights on the other vessel. When he returned to the bridge front, he suddenly saw a mast, with lights on it, passing extremely close to the starboard side and called out in alarm to the second mate. The second mate immediately engaged manual steering and applied 15° of port rudder. The seaman went to the starboard bridge wing from where he saw a vessel about two ship lengths astern. The second mate and the seaman had apparently not heard or felt any impact and they assumed that the other vessel had passed clear. The second mate heard the fishing vessel‘s calls to the ship on VHF, but he did not acknowledge them. He also heard its communications with Brisbane Radio, but he did not respond. About 0750, the agent of the ship had been informed by the Brisbane harbour master that the ship had been in a collision with the fishing vessel.

73．There were _______ persons on the bridge when the accident occurred.

A. 1 B. 2 C. 3 D. 4

74．It is inferred that the 2/O was _______ when the close quarter situation was developing.

A. talking over VHF with the fishing ship

B. not keeping a proper lookout, and allowed himself to be distracted by his radio

conversation with his friend

C. engaging himself in other things which are more urgent at the moment D. keeping a proper lookout but failed to identify the fishing ship 75．It can be concluded that ______.

A. the two ships did not collided each other

B. the two ships collided each other, but none of them acknowledged the accident C. only the fishing ship acknowledged the accident at the moment D. only the big ship acknowledged the accident at the moment

76．Of the following, ______ is not likely to be the contributing factor of the accident.

A. the second mate was not keeping a proper look out at the moment B. the seaman did not report to 2/O what he saw

C. the fishing ship was not keeping a proper look out at the moment

D. in the night it was too dark or too difficult for the crew members to identify each other

三．中译英（共5题，请将答案写在答题纸上）

77. 三副应经常检查防火门,防火挡板和通风系统的操作情况。 78. 两只救生筏的检验证书将在下月15日到期。

79.（航海日志）恢复各舱装货, 但因阵雨而断续地工作。 80.（航海日志）锚离底, 在引航员的指挥向河下游航进。 81.（航海日志）船颠簸剧烈, 船首时有上浪。 题号--答案 1--C 6--A 11--B 16--D 21--C 26--A 31--D 36--C 41--B 46--B 51--C 56--D 61--C 66--B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

题号--答案 2--B 7--A 12--D 17--B 22--C 27--A 32--D 37--A 42--A 47--C 52--B 57--A 62--C 67--A 题号--答案 3--C 8--A 13--A 18--B 23--A 28--C 33--B 38--B 43--A 48--C 53--B 58--B 63--A 68--A 题号--答案 4--B 9--C 14--A 19--A 24--B 29--A 34--B 39--D 44--C 49--A 54-B 59--B --A 69--DADC 题号--答案 5--D 10--A 15--B 20--D 25--B 30--A 35--D 40--A 45--B 50--B 55--A 60-C 65--B 70--BBCD 右满舵意思是 船舶不使用雷达港湾是危险的 探照灯用于夜间通过运河 去把你的托运人我的房间来 允许我一些证据为你的进一步考虑 他们的大学教育将来在海上有许多新的被展示 意指船舶在材料，结构，设备，船员和在从事航行或服务的装备方面的充分性 以下是标准用语 以下是标准用语

以下哪一项最能说明船上装载多少货物？

泡沫灭火通过

工人的过失导致的船舶设备的损坏经常发生。因此，工人应其损坏修理的费用

16. 你船配备有全封闭式救生艇。当艇被火焰包围时哪一句是正确的？

17. 火灾起于你船添加燃油其间。你应首先 18. 在船舶管理中被要求的消防演习中，所有人员必须报告它们的位臵和模拟

指派给他们的任务完成的能力 19.

20. 对于规定，货油舱在进行什么操作前和过程中必须被惰化？ 21.

22. 防擦装臵被用于 23. 将在遇险中的船员和乘客从船上撤离叫 24. 万一紧急情况为减轻船的重量或改善船的稳性将货物抛入海中叫 25.

26. 在雷达标绘中，C.P.A.是的缩写 27. 船在下星期大西洋到美国 28. 意味着在地球表面与所有的经线（子午线）切割相交成相同的角度 29. 为了有时有必要船首尾系两个浮筒 30. 我们在锚地直到晚上 31. 有时船舶在开敞锚地抛双锚锚泊以 32. 每一艘船在接近或进入港口时应升起 33. 至于工作的详情，英版无线电信号表

34. 关于船舶的旋回圈，术语横距（又称―正移量‖）意指船舶

35. 我有舵效航速。意思是说 36. 因为有很多电缆，船舶在虚线标志的区域里 37. 普通语言通常被用于海上天气 38. 当一个气团的温度减小时，则

39. 在北半球夏季，阵风风向顺时针方向变化，温度骤降，雷暴雨或暴风骤雨（冬季频繁的

雨雪交加），然后随着气压上空晴朗，表明通过 40.

41. 34N 135E处的低压东南缓慢移动，强度不变。这个描述很可能在标题为的下

面

42. 大部分地区好转中.这预报指的是指定区域的 43. 将货物装到你船上的托运人为货物提供一份保函。这样做的目的是为了获得清洁提 44. 没有助航设施被呈现且海图点虚线内的水深更改没有被改正。为有更详细的信息，必须

大比例尺海图

45. 在英版海图修订版中，被最先改正 46. 任何国家的船舶均无线电医疗咨询服务并且这项服务不收费 47. 液化石油气固有的一个主要危险是 48. 航路指南通过被）保持最新

49. 所有与航次有关的事件，诸如船位，航速和气象的详细资料都被记录在中 50. 海图有很大范围的地方需要修改。当这些修改被进行且海图被重新印制时，海图的出版

叫 51. 自差是之间的角 52. 在什么样航程中，两点之间的恒向线的距离与大圆距离相差较大？

53.

54. 海图标注水深是 55. 航海者穿越主航道被推荐以穿越 56. 相对方位总是从船首开始量起 57. 在一定的环境下，可能会发现雷达信标的发射导致雷达正常显示，特别在近

距离时

58. 北始终在雷达银屏的上方的雷达显示方式是一种 59. 60. 61.

62. 你船配备有固定CO2和火灾主要系统。万一机舱电器着火，正确的灭火程序是什么？

63. 是通过应用最后的已知船位，利用船舶的航向和计程仪显示走过的距离来推算

. 65. 66. 67. 68.

任何时刻的船位 我们去看看罗经处于良好状态 你船使用自动舵夜航。你注意到船的航向缓慢向右变化。你首先应采取什么动作？

操限船是一艘 假如在交叉态势中你船是直航船 假如环境许可，被规则要求应给他船让路的每一艘船舶应避免 中华人民共和国海事局

2005年第2期海船船员适任证书全国统考试题（总第37期）

科目：航海英语 试卷代号：903 适用对象：无限航区、近洋航区二/三副

(本试卷卷面总分100分，及格分为70分，考试时间100分钟)

答题说明：请选择一个最合适的答案，并将该答案按答题卡要求，在相应位置上用2B铅笔涂黑。第1题至68题，每题1分，第69题至76题，每题1.5分，第77题至81题每题4分。

一．单项选择题

1. A synthetic mooring line is being heaved on a capstan．There is moderate strain on the line．The

line begins to slip．Which of the following should be done？① Stop the capstan and take extra turns． ② Have more than one seaman keep a substantial strain on the line and continue heaving easy．

A. ① only B. ② only C. Both ① and ② D. Neither ① nor ② 2. ______Two degree on starboard．

A. What rudder B. How heading C. Are you on your course D. How answer 3. You should plot your dead reckoning position ______.

A. when you obtain an estimated position B. ONLY in piloting waters C. at every speed change D. All of the above are correct 4. Vessel must be ______duly qualified officers and crew．

A. supplied with B. equipped by C. manned with D. fitted with

5. The ship's officers must ______checking on the stowage of all the cargoes loaded on board．

A. do B. be interested in C. have relation to D. be troubled with 6. Heavy fuel oils when spilled are ______.

A. more harmful to sea life than lighter oils B. easier to clean up than lighter refined oils C. less harmful to sea life than lighter oils D. not a real threat to marine life 7. ______will reduce the visibility．

A. dust B. sea water C. land sand D. wind

8. The commander of a rescue unit designated to co-ordinate search and rescue operations within a

specified area is the ______．

A. General commander B. Commander general C. Search commander D. On-scene commander

9. Failure to comply with the clauses of charter party may result in action against the vessel．

A. be making B. being taken C. be taking D. being made 10. Which of the following best indicates how many tons of cargo a ship can carry？ A. Bale cubic B. Deadweight C. Gross tonnage D. Net tonnage

11. You are at anchor in fog on a 120-meter power-driven vessel. You hear the fog signal of a vessel

approaching off your port bow. You may sound ______.

A. one short，one prolonged，and one short blast B. one prolonged，one short and one prolonged C. one prolonged blast D. two short blasts

12. Fire hose couplings ______.

A. are made of bronze，brass，or soft alloy metals B. should be painted red in order to identify hose lengths C. are specially hardened to prevent crushing D. should be greased frequently

13. A Doppler speed log indicates speed over ground ______.

A. at all times B. in the bottom return mode C. in the volume reverberation mode D. only when there is no current 14. Bilge soundings indicate ______.

A. the amount of condensation in the hold B. whether the cargo is leaking or not C. whether the vessel is taking on water D. All of the above 15. The type of extinguisher which should be used for an electricity fire is ______．

A. foam or soda acid B. dry chemical or foam C. carbon dioxide or dry chemical D. carbon dioxide or foam 16. Line throwing equipment should not be operated ______.

A. during a rain storm B. in an explosive atmosphere C. near a lifeboat station D. by other than licensed officers 17. Prior to entering a davit-launched life raft， you should make sure that ______.

A. the life raft is well ventilated of excess carbon dioxide

B. all personnel have removed their life preservers to facilitate boarding C. the door flap has been cut away and stowed inside the raft D. All of the above

18. An example of a messenger is a ______.

A. fairlead B. heaving line C. stay D. warp

19. There is another thing I want to let you know．The lighting in the hold is very poor，even

______dark to work the cargo．

A. if B. very C. too D. very much

20. The degree of being seen under certain weather condition is called______.

A. Front B. Depression C. Swell D. Visibility 21. If the metacentric height is small，a floating vessel will ______.

A. be tender B. have a quick and rapid motion C. be stiff D. yaw

22. A tanker is cargo ship constructed or ______ for the carriage in bulk liquid cargoes of an

inflammable nature.

A. adapted B. adopted C. damp D. dump

23. A block that can be opened at the hook or shackle end to receive a bight of the line is a ______.

A. bight block B. gin block C. heel block D. snatch block 24. Certain cargoes must be segregated(隔离) because of their ______.

A. inherent characteristics B. weight C. destination D. danger to humans 25. Foreman，the ship ______，please get the stevedores to fill the port wings with heavier packages．

A. lists to starboard B. is shifting to starboard

C. is inclined to starboard D. is listing to starboard

26. My vessel ______bad weather with winds reaching force 9 on her way home．

A. encountered B. faced C. found D. met 27. You are getting closer to the vessel ______，which is on the same course as you．

A. head B. ahead C. headed D. heading

28. The entries in the Official Logbook must be signed by the Master and ______.

A. the Chief Engineer B. the person about whom the entry concerns C. one other crew member D. No other signature is required 29. Pitching is angular motion of the vessel about what axis（轴）?

A. Longitudinal B. Transverse C. Vertical D. Centerline 30. A vessel moored with two anchors，sometimes，at an exposed roadstead to ______．

A. aid turning the ship B. obtain a fine bearing

C. increase ship swings to wind or tide D. lighten the stress of anchor chains 31. ______of the following need NOT be entered in the Official Logbook？

A. The testing of the internal combustion engine driven emergency generators at least once each

month the vessel is navigated．

B. The testing of storage batteries for emergency lighting and power systems once each 6 months

the vessel is navigated．

C. The actual draft when the vessel arrives in salt water after departing a port D. The testing of the line-throwing appliance once every 3 months 32. The pilot said he ______our vessel directly to the berth．

A. will take B. took C. is taking D. would take

33. When my ship arrived there，their ship ______．

A. has left already B. left already C. had left already D. would left already 34. For determining the amount of chains used in anchoring operation，which one of the following

factors wouldn't be considered？

A. selection of landmarks B. character of sea bottom

C. strength of current and wind force D. radius of ship swing to wind or tide 35. In case of accidents ______the risk of sinking，all effective measures shall be taken to steer clear

of the fairway to avoid ______the traffic. A. involving／impeding B. involved／to impede C. involving／to impede D. involved／impeding

36. The Authority reserves the right not to accept ______for pilots by vessels in anchorages if the vessels have not reported their anchored position．

A. bookings B. commands C. orders D. reports

37. In the southern hemisphere the wind flow associated with a low pressure system will have which

of the following characteristic？

A. the wind velocity is least near the center of the system B. the direction of the flow is counter-clockwise C. both A and B D. neither A or B

38. The ship is not very stable，please ______when making a turn．

A. stop down B. speed down C. slow down D. down slow

39. High clouds，composed of small white flakes（片状） or scaly（鳞状） globular masses，and

often banded together to form a mackerel sky（鱼鳞天），would be classified as ______. A. cirrus B. cirrocumulus C. altostratus D. cumulonimbus 40. A cyclone in its final stage of development is called a(n) ______.

A. tornado B. anticyclone C. occluded cyclone or occluded front D. polar cyclone 41. LOW AT 34N 135E ESLY SLWLY INTST NC．This description is most likely to be under the

heading of ______．

A. GL WNG B. GEN SYN C. STM WNG D. T Y WNG 42. MODERATE WAVES，TAKING A MORE PRONOUNCED LONG FORM；MANY WHITE

HORSES ARE FORMED．THIS sea condition is likely to be termed ______． A. moderate breeze B. fresh breeze C. strong breeze D. near gale

43. No navigational aids are shown and chart is not kept corrected for alterations in depths inside the

pecked lines．For more detailed information，the larger scale charts must be ______． A. bought B. analyzed C. consulted D. published

44. On small scale charts of ocean areas where hydrographic information is，in many cases，still

______，charted shoals may be in error as regards position，depth and extent． A. spare B. spade C. sparse D. spear 45. The true course between two points is 078°. Your gyro-compass has an error of 2°E. You make

an allowance of 3°leeway for a north wind. What gyro-course should be steered to make the true course good? A. 073°per gyro-compass B. 079°per gyro-compass C. 075°per gyro-compass D. 077°per gyro-compass

46. A radio medical advice service ______ships of all nationalities and no charge is made for this

service．

A. is available to B. is available for C. are available to D. are available for 47. After abandoning a vessel，water that is consumed within the first 24 hours will ______.

A. pass through the body with little absorbed by the system B. help to prevent fatigue C. help to prevent seasickness D. quench thirst for only 2 hours 48. Sailing directions are kept up to date by ______．

A. publications B. notices to mariners

C. supplements D. Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners

49. The charts sold are of ______．

A. newly edition with up to date correction and in reasonable prices．

B. the current edition and incorporate the last Notices to Mariners correction

C. the current edition and incorporate the latest Notices to Mariners correction at the time of sale

D. brand-new one with up to date correction and clean writing 50. Admiralty Notices to Mariners are published ______．

A. every day B. every week C. every month D. every year

51. Chart legends printed in capital letters show that the associated landmark is ______.

A. conspicuous B. inconspicuous C. a government facility or station D. a radio transmitter

52. The positions and characteristics of lights and buoys shown within the port area are ______．

A. untrue B. impossible C. suspectful D. unimportant 53. The light vessel is reported ______．

A. to be destroyed B. to be demolished C. to be ruined D. to be spoiled 54. Navigational warnings are published according to ______．

A. the designed area B. the designated area C. the indicated area D. all area over the world

55. Which of the following statement is correct regarding ship handling when in the vicinity of traffic separation schemes?(1)A vessel shall，so far as practicable，avoid crossing traffic lanes (2)If obliged to cross traffic lanes，she shall do so as nearly as practicable at right angles to the general direction of traffic flow．

A. (1) only B. (2) only C. Both(1) and (2) D. Neither (1) nor (2)

56. A vessel engaged in fishing shall not impede the passage of _____following a traffic lane.

(1). a power_driven vessel (2). a sailing vessel (3). any vessel (4). a vessel of less than 20 metres in length

A. (1) B. (1) & (2) C. (3) D. (4) 57. It may be found that，in certain circumstances，radar beacon emissions can cause ______with the

normal radar display，particularly at close range．

A. unwanted interference B. unexpected figures C. abnormal data D. unwanted information

58. Shorter pulse lengths which may be repeated at a faster rate (higher pulse repetition frequency) on

short ranges will give _______at those ranges.

A. Good Bearing discrimination B. Good Range discrimination C. Poor Bearing discrimination D. Poor Range discrimination

59. The fitting of an efficient radar reflector is likely to considerably increase the ship's probability of ______．

A. detection B. being detected C. the detective D. the detected

60. Your radar is set on a true motion display. Which of the following will NOT appear to move

across the PPI scope? A. Echoes from a buoy B. Own ship's marker

C. Echo from a ship on the same course at the same speed D. Echo from a ship on a reciprocal course at the same speed 61. When does a pilot say MAKE ALL LINES FAST? He says it when ______．

A. the ship is very close to the pier B. the ship is about to be in position

C. the ship is in position D. the ship is getting alongside the pier

62. ______is the process by which the position of the vessel at any moment is found by applying the

last well-determined position to the run that has been made since，using for this purpose the ship's course and the distance being those indicated by log．

A. dead reckoning B. dead weight C. dead slow ahead D. dead slow astern 63. If the officer on watch is in any doubt as to the pilot's actions，or intentions，he should ______．

A. notify the Captain as soon as possible B. seek clarification from the pilot

C. take action by his own judgment D. cease the duty of pilot's at once

. If the gyrocompass error is east，what describes the error and the correction to be made to

gyrocompass headings to obtain true headings?

A. The readings are too low (small numerically) and the amount of the error must be added to the compass to obtain true

B. The readings are too low and the amount of the error must be subtracted from the compass to obtain true

C. The readings are too high (large numerically) and the amount of the error must be added to the compass to obtain true

D. The readings are too high and the amount of the error must be subtracted from the compass to obtain true 65. My gyro-compass ______is two degrees east．

A. trouble B. error C. wrong D. mistake 66. Which statement applies to a vessel constrained by her draft?

A. The term only applies to vessels in narrow channels

B. She is severely restricted in her ability to change her course because of her draft in relation to the available depth and width of navigable water

C. She is designated as a vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver D. The vessel must be over 100 meters in length 67. On the high seas，a fog signal consisting of one prolonged blast followed by four short blasts

would indicate the presence of a ______． A. vessel being towed

B. fishing vessel engaged in trawling

C. vessel at anchor warning you of her location D. power-driven pilot vessel on station underway 68. You have a vessel astern of you and you desire to make a right turn． You should ______.

A. sound one blast and come right B. sound one blast and wait for his answer C. sound two blasts and come right D. sound two blasts and wait for his answer

二．关联题（每组关联题题干下有4个小题，每小题4个选项） 第一组：

Cargoes to be carried by this type of ship are pre-packed into containers before being loaded aboard the ship.

Containers are sealed after being packed with cargoes. Made of metal or other durable materials, they are watertight after sealing and can therefore be stowed on deck whilst being carried. One of the features of container ships is that some of the containers are usually stowed on deck.

The container ship is becoming increasingly popular in trading circles, and the trend is that the tonnage thereof will grow at a faster pace in future.

69. What does ―innovation‖ in the first paragraph mean?

A. making changes

B. the introduction of an antigenic substance into the body against a specific disease C. The act of introducing something new.

D. revolution

70. Containers are sealed after being packed with cargoes.

A. filled B. loaded

C. stuffed D. closed officially or under the supervision of notary public 71. Of the following, ________ is not the feature of the container ship?

A. Some of the containers are usually stowed on deck. B. It is easy for handling and quick turnover of the cargo C. The container ship is becoming increasingly safer D. Cargoes are pre-packed into the container 72. The tonnage of container ship is ________.

A. decreasing B. increasing C. remaining the same D. changing

第二组：

No chart is infallible. Every chart is liable to be incomplete, either through imperfections in the survey on which it is based, or through subsequent alterations to the topography or seabed. However, in the vicinity of recognized shipping lanes charts may be used with confidence for normal navigational needs. The mariner must be the final judge of the reliance he can place on the information given, bearing in mind his particular circumstances and the other aids available, such as the judicious use of the echo sounder and radar, and local pilotage guidance.

73. Why is every chart liable to defects?

(1) the imperfect weather report. (2)the imperfect survey. (3) the subsequent alterations to the structure of the vessel. (4) the subsequent changes to the terrain.(5) the ensuing changes to the seabed.

A. (1) (2) (4) B. (2) (4) 5) C. (1) (3) (4) (5) D. (2) (3) (4)

74. The mariner should appeal to _______ for the reliance on the information available.

A. the judge B. the port authority C. himself D. the agent

75. The mariner should take _______ into serious consideration when using the information given.

A. particular conditions B. the number of crew C. other aids available D. both A and C 76. In the vicinity of well-established shipping route, _______.

A. no chart is infallible.

B. the local pilotage guidance is required.

C. charts may be used with confidence for normal navigational needs. D. other aids available should be inoperative.

三．中译英（共5题，请将答案写在答题纸上）

77．除非另有说明，地理位置均应参照最大比例尺海图。 78．应定期试验救生消防设备、通讯设备和甲板照明设备。 79．（航海日志）启动陀螺罗经并调整复示器及核对磁罗经。 80．（航海日志）调整速度和航向，检查甲板上移动物体并紧固。 81．（航海日志）锚泊在检疫锚地等待医生为全体船员注射。

题号--答案 1--A 题号--答案 2--A 题号--答案 3--A 题号--答案 4--C 题号--答案 5--A 6--C 11--A 16--B 21--A 26--A 31--A 36--C 41--B 46--B 51--A 56--C 61--C 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36.

7--A 12--A 17--A 22--A 27--B 32--D 37--D 42--B 47--A 52--A 57--A 62--A 8--D 13--B 18--B 23--D 28--C 33--C 38--C 43--C 48--C 53--B 58--B 63--B 9--B 14--D 19--C 24--A 29--B 34--A 39--B 44--C 49--C 54--B 59--B --A 10--B 15--C 20--D 25--D 30--D 35--A 40--C 45--A 50--B 55--C 60--A 65--B 66--B 67--D 68--A 69-72--xxCB 73-76--BCDC 在绞盘上绞拉合成纤维绳。缆绳中度受力。缆绳滑动。应做以下哪一项？①。②更多的人拉绳并继续绞拉 右舷2度 在每一个移线定位，航线改变和速度改变时你应标绘推算船位 船舶必须足够的合格驾驶员和船员 船舶驾驶员必须装载货物在船上的积载情况 泄露的重燃料油

将降低能见度

被指定为在特殊区域内进行协调救助的指挥员是 有遵守上述的（规定）可能提起针对船舶的诉讼 下列哪一项最好地显示船舶能够装载多少货物？

连接软管的接头 多普勒测速仪显示相对海底的速度 舱底测深显示 被用于电器火灾的灭火器类型是 抛绳设备不能在充满中使用 在进入吊艇架放入水中的救生筏之前，你应确保救生筏

是引缆的一种

我想让你知道另一件事。货舱内的照明很差，

假如稳性高度很小，漂浮的船将 油轮是建造或适用于运输易燃性质的散装液体货的货船 一个在钩或卸扣处能够被打开以接收弯曲的绳索的滑车叫 某几种货物必须被隔离是因为它们的 工头，船舶，请让工人用重货将左边的上甲板外侧填装满 我船在返回港口途中九级风的坏天气 你正在接近（更近）与你同向的船 船舶志的记录内容必须被船长和签字 纵摇是船体对于哪一个轴的角运动？ 有时船舶在开敞锚地抛双锚锚泊以 以下哪项不需要记入航海日志中？

引航员说他将直接操船靠泊。 当我船到那儿的时候，他们的船

在锚泊操作中确定锚链的长度，以下哪一项不被考虑？ 万一沉船事故的危险中，应采取所有有效的措施驶离航道以避免交通 假如锚地的锚泊船没有报告它们的船位，管理机构将保留不接受申请引航员的

37. 在南半球，与低压系统有关的风向将有以下哪些特点？① 风速近系统中心最小。（正好

相反）② 风向为逆时针方向。 38. 船舶不是非常稳定，请在旋回时 39. 高云，由小白斑雪片或鳞状球团组成，且经常联合在一起形成鱼鳞天，将被分类为

40. 气旋发展到最后阶段叫做 41. 34N 135E处的低压东南缓慢移动，强度不变。这个描述很可能在标题为的下

面

42. 中等波浪，引起更长的泡沫，形成许多白浪。这种海况很可能是 43. 没有助航设施被呈现且海图点虚线内的水深更改没有被改正。为有更详细的信息，必须

大比例尺海图

44. 在很多情况下，大洋水域的小比例尺海图的水文资料仍，所标水区的位臵，水

深和范围可能有误 45.

46. 任何国家的船舶均无线电医疗咨询服务并且这项服务不收费 47. 弃船以后，在最初24小时里消耗的水将通过身体少量地被系统吸收 48. 航路指南通过被）保持最新 49. 出售的海图是 50. 英版航海通告被出版

51. 海图标题被打印为大写字母表示相关的陆标是 52. 港口区域内指示的灯标和浮筒的位置和特性不正确 53. 据报灯船被 54. 依照发布航行警告

55. 关于船舶在分道通航制的附近水域操作，以下哪一项是正确的‗ 56.

57. 在一定的环境下，可能会发现雷达信标的发射导致雷达正常显示，特别在近

距离时 58.

59. 有效的雷达反射器装臵很可能增加船舶的可能性 60. 你的雷达设为真运动显示模式。以下哪一个在平面位臵显示器范围内将不出现移动？

61. 62. 是通过应用最后的已知船位，利用船舶的航向和计程仪显示走过的距离来推算

任何时刻的船位

63. 假如驾驶员对引水员动作的意图有任何的怀疑，他应 . 假如电罗经误差偏东，怎么描述误差和改正电罗经艏向而获得真艏向？

65. 我的电罗经偏东两度 66. 哪个陈述适用于限于吃水船？

67. 在公海，由一长接着四短声的雾号将表明 68. 有一船在你船尾并且你意欲（准备）右转。你应 中华人民共和国海事局

2005年第1期海船船员适任证书全国统考试题（总第36期）

科目：航海英语 试卷代号：903 适用对象：无限航区、近洋航区二/三副

(本试卷卷面总分100分，及格分为70分，考试时间100分钟)

答题说明：请选择一个最合适的答案，并将该答案按答题卡要求，在相应位置上用2B铅笔涂黑。第1题至68题，每题1分，第69题至76题，每题1.5分，第77题至81题每题4分。

一．单项选择题

1. Weekly NMs are available without subscription from appointed ______.

A. Admiralty Distributors

B. Admiralty Publication House

C. United Kingdom Hydrographic Office (UKHO) D. UK Maritime & Coastguard Agency (MCA) 2. A bowline is used to ______.

A. join lines of equal size B. form a temporary eye (loop) at the end of a line C. be a stopper D. keep a line from fraying

3. For the deepest water when rounding a bend in a river，you should navigate your vessel ______.

A. toward the inside of the bend B. toward the outside of the bend C. toward the center of the river just before the bend，then change course for the river's center after the bend D. in the river's center

4. Oil slick caused by spillage of oil from tanker ship is ______.

A. a drop of oil B. the emulsion of oil at sea surface

C. the weathered oil D. the oil floating on the surface of the sea water 5. ______ is not a process of weathering of the oil spilled in the sea water.

A. Evaporation B. Dispersion C. Emulsification D. Drifting 6. Buoyancy is a measure of the ship's ______.

A. ability to float B. deadweight C. freeboard D. midships strength 7. PAN - PAN is to be used to announce ______．

A. a distress message B. an urgency message C. a safety message D. a massage of SMCP

8. PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM: LOUDSPEAKERS IN THE VESSEL'S CABINS，MESS

ROOMS，ETC.，AND ON DECK VIA WHICH IMPORTANT INFORMATION CAN BE BROADCAST FROM A CENTRAL POINT，MOSTLY FROM THE NAVIGATION BRIDGE defines ______．

A. PP-system B. PA-system C. AP-system D. AA-system 9. MOVING OF AN ANCHOR OVER THE SEA BOTTOM TO CONTROL THE MOVEMENT OF THE VESSEL defines ______．

A. Dredging (of anchor) B. Dragging (of anchor) C. Weighing anchor D. Walking out anchor

10. A set of interior steps on a ship leading up to a deck from below is known as ______.

A. a companion way B. tween-decks

C. stairs D. Any of the above are acceptable 11. What does MBDD mean on the load waterline mark？

A. Timber tropical load waterline B. Timber summer load waterline

C. Timber winter load waterline D. Timber winter North Atlantic load waterline 12. An emergency sea anchor may be constructed by using ______.

A. a boat bucket B. an air tank filled with water C. an oar and canvas weighted down D. All of the above

13. Increasing the number of slack liquid tanks has the effect of raising the ______.

A. uncorrected KG B. maximum allowed KG C. virtual height of the center of gravity D. metacentric height 14. All echo-sounders can measure the ______.

A. actual depth of water B. actual depth of water below keel C. average depth from waterline to hard bottom D. average depth of water to soft bottom 15. Kapok life jackets should NOT be ______.

A. stowed near open flame or where smoking is permitted

B. used as seats，pillows，or foot rests C. left on open decks D. All of the above

16. If not attached to the nozzle，each low-velocity spray applicator on a vessel must be stowed

______.

A. in a protected area on the main deck

B. inside a machinery space near the entrance

C. next to the fire hydrant to which the fire hose is attached D. on a rack inside the quarters near the entrance 17. During a fire drill on a vessel，what action is required?

A. Start each fire pump B. Launch and run a lifeboat C. Inventory rescue and fire equipment D. Inspect fire hoses 18. An inflatable life raft should be lifted back aboard the ship by using ______.

A. the single hook at the top of the raft B. two lines passed under the raft C. the towing bridle D. All of the above

19. If a magnetic compass is not affected by any magnetic field other than the Earth's，which

statement is TRUE?

A. Compass error and variation are equal B. Compass north will be true north C. Variation will equal deviation D. There will be no compass error 20. It is usually unnecessary, and indeed often impossible, ______ every printed clause.

A. to give rise to B. giving give rise to C. given give full effect to D. to give full effect to 21. The wheel order STEADY means ________．

A. the steering gear is very stable

B. the rudder is to be held in the fore and aft position C. reducing swing as rapidly as possible

D. reducing amount of rudder angle to certain degrees

22. Placing a lashing across a hook to prevent a fitting from slipping out of the hook is called ______.

A. faking B. flemishing down C. mousing D. worming 23. On cargo booms，preventers are ______.

A. auxiliary guys B. extra fair leads C. steel bands D. stops

24. Forces within a vessel have caused a difference between the starboard and port drafts. This

difference is called ______.

A. list B. heel C. trim D. flotation 25. In small-angle stability，when external forces exist，the buoyant force is assumed to act vertically

upwards through the center of buoyancy and through the ______.

A. center of gravity B. center of flotation C. metacenter D. metacentric height 26. The vessel was drifted off from her ______ due to strong wind．

A. course B. track C. direction D. trend

27. Please tell me ________ to reverse your engine from full ahead to full astern．

A. how length will it take B. how long it will take

C. how long will it get D. how much hours it will take

28. The common way to obtain your ship's position is ______．

A. keeping a close watch and lookout B. taking a radar range and bearing C. observing a radar target and listening to signals D. keeping a well clear caution 29. It is sometimes necessary to moor bow and stern to two mooring buoys in order to ______．

A. avoid any swing in a restricted space B. shelter the ship from strong winds

C. prevent to touch with other vessels D. make a convenience of cargo discharging 30. Ship security officer is . A. the guard posted on the vessel

B. a person responsible for implementation of international ship and port security code on board ship

C. the master of the vessel D. All the above 31. SINGLE UP FORWARD TO HEAD LINE AND SPRING means ________．

A. let go all the lines forward including head line and spring B. let go the head line and spring only

C. let go all the lines except a head line and a spring D. let go the head line and spring including all the lines

32. A twin screw vessel，making headway with both engines turning ahead，will turn more readily to

starboard if you ______. A. reverse port engine，apply right rudder B. reverse port engine，rudder amidships C. reverse starboard engine，apply right rudder D. reverse starboard engine，rudder amidships 33. Every ship should hoist ______ when approaching and entering ports．

A. its flashing light B. the ship's name C. its identification D. its signal letters 34. Which of the following statement is not correct as to the use of auto-piloting?

A. The auto-piloting shall be checked by the duty officer every hour B. The manual-piloting shall be tested at least once every watch

C. The use of auto-piloting is at the discretion of duty officers instead of the helmsman

D. The transferring of manual-piloting and auto-piloting shall be undertaken by the duty officer, or under his supervision 35. When a vessel is aground，______．

A. she is underway B. she is not underway

C. whether she is underway cannot be determined D. she might be or not be underway 36. From ______ the mariner can know the data of tide．

A. the Sea Pilot B. the Cargo Plan C. the Tide Table D. the Port List 37. A series of brief showers accompanied by strong，shifting winds may occur along or some

distance ahead of a(n) ______.

A. upper front aloft B. cyclone C. occluded front D. cold front 38. Sometimes a tropical storm moves so slowly that a vessel，if astern of it，can ______ it．

A. cross B. approach C. proceed near D. run into 39. If a weather bulletin shows the center of a low pressure system to be 100 miles due east of you，

what winds can you expect in the Southern Hemisphere? ______. A. South-southwesterly B. North-northwesterly

C. South-southeasterly D. North-northeasterly 40. Cloud formations are minimal when the ______.

A. surface temperature and temperature aloft are equal B. surface temperature and temperature aloft differ greatly C. barometric pressure is very low D. relative humidity is very high

41. INTERTROPICAL CONVERGENCE ZONE OVER SOUTH PHILIPPINE PASSING OVER MINDANAO NORTHERN SULU AND PALAWAN．This paragraph is likely to be under the heading of ______．

A. GALE WARNING B. 24 HOURS FORECAST C. SYNOPSIS D. STORM WARNING

42. A security level, for which appropriate additional protective security measures shall be maintained

for a period of time as a result of heightened risk of a security incident is defined as ______. A. Security level 1 B. Security level 2 C. Security level 3 D. Security level 4 43. On discovery of new dangers，of changes or defects in aids to navigation，Masters of vessels

should immediately inform ______．

A. their government B. their port of registry C. British Government D. Hydrographer of the Navy of Ministry of Defense of U．K 44. Mariners are FIRST warned of serious defects or important changes to aids to navigation by

means of ______.

A. marine broadcast Notice to Mariners B. Weekly Notices to Mariners C. corrected editions of charts D. Light Lists 45. In revised editions of Admiralty charts the ______ are corrected first．

A. smaller scales B. larger scales C. smaller scales and larger scales D. moderate scales

46. On a chart，the characteristic of the light on a lighthouse is shown as flashing white with a red

sector. The red sector ______.

A. indicates the limits of the navigable channel B. indicates a danger area

C. is used to identify the characteristics of the light D. serves no significant purpose 47. One of the principal dangers inherent in liquefied petroleum gas is that ______.

A. as it warms up it becomes heavier than air B. the way it reacts with sea water C. its low temperature causes frostbite or freezing D. the strong odor it produces 48. Attention is ______ the advice on the use of charts in The Mariner's Handbook Chapter 3，

Section 1．

A. fixed to B. needed for C. pushed to D. drawn to 49. Generally， ______ are used as the track charts on the high sea， ______ are used for harbors，

inland waters and coastal areas．

A. Mercator charts／Loran charts B. Admiralty charts／Routeing charts C. large scale charts／small scale charts D. small scale charts／large scale charts 50. You may find the time of slack water after low water in a certain port from ______．

A. Deadweight Scale B. Tide Tables C. Notices to Mariners D. Table of Azimuth 51. The navigational term Set of current means ______．

A. velocity of current in knots B. direction from which the current flows C. estimated current D. direction toward which the current flows

52. The short-long dashed， magenta lines parallel to York River Entrance Channel mark ______.

A. fish trap areas B. naval exercise areas

C. underwater cables D. recommended track lines 53. ______ chart 3994，positions read from this chart should be shifted 0．03 minutes Northward．

A. To consider B. To check C. To examine D. To agree with 54. Charts are subject to frequent correction according to ______．

A. Notices to Mariners B. Mariner's handbook C. Sailing Directions D. Guide to Port Entry

55. The Pilotage-quarantine anchorage， ______ between Damen Dao and Qingshan Dao，is defined

by the lines ______ the given points．

A. situated／connected B. situated／connecting C. situating／connected D. situating／connecting

56. Mariners proceeding across the main routes are recommended to do so at ______.

A. as wide an angle as practicable B. as wide an angle so practicable C. like wide an angle as practicable D. like wide as angle so practicable 57. SWEEP INT on radar panel is the abbreviation of ______．

A. sweep introduction B. sweep interest C. sweep intention D. sweep intensity 58. A storm is forecast for the area where your vessel is moored. For its safety you should put

________.

A. more slack in the mooring lines B. a strain on the mooring lines

C. chafing gear on the mooring lines D. grease on the mooring lines 59. In determining if risk of collision exists，such risk may sometimes exist even when an appreciable

bearing change is evident，particularly when approaching ______．

A. very large vessel B. a long tow C. a vessel at close range D. all A，B and C 60. Owing to old data of the survey the positions and number of the beacons shown on this chart are not to be ________．

A. considered B. insured C. relied upon D. suspected 61. The abbreviation PPI in the Sperry Collision Avoidance System means ______．

A. plan position indicator B. plain position indicator C. plane position indication D. policy proof of interest

62. Defense plans may cause the operation of electronic aids to navigation to be suspended with

______.

A. no notice B. one day's notice C. a week's notice D. thirty (30) days notice 63. One of the following is not a integral part of ship security plan.

A. Internal and external communication B. Restricted areas C. Access to ship D. Non of the above . The annual change in ______ is －0.2 degree east in this water area．

A. marine insurance B. magnetic variation C. maritime accident D. mean high water 65. Deviation in a compass is caused by the ______.

A. vessel's geographic position B. vessel's heading

C. earth's magnetic field D. influence of the magnetic materials of the vessel 66. When is a stand-on vessel FIRST allowed by the Rules to take action in order to avoid collision?

______.

A. When the two vessels are less than half a mile from each other

B. When the give-way vessel is not taking appropriate action to avoid collision C. When collision is imminent

D. The stand-on vessel is never allowed to take action

67. When underway in a channel，you should ______.

A. stay near the middle of the channel

B. keep to the starboard side of any vessels you meet

C. exchange whistle signals with any other vessels in the channel D. keep to the side of the channel which lies to your starboard

68. You intend to overtake a vessel in a narrow channel. As you approach the other vessel's stern

________.

A. you will gain speed B. both vessels will gain speed C. the vessels will drift together D. the vessels will drift apart

二．关联题（每组关联题题干下有4个小题，每小题4个选项）

第一组：

Charts should be used with prudence：there are areas where the source data are old，incomplete or of poor quality. The mariner should use the largest scale appropriate for his particular purpose；apart from being the most detailed，the larger scales are usually corrected first. When extensive new information (such as a new hydrographic survey) is received，some months must elapse before it can be fully incorporated in published charts. On small scale charts of ocean areas where hydrographic information is，in many cases，still sparse，charted shoals may be in error as regards position，least depth and extent. Undiscovered dangers may exist，particularly away from well-established routes.

69. ______are the most detailed.

A. the larger scale charts B. the smaller scale charts C. the charts covering the area where the source data are old，incomplete or of poor quality D. the charts which are corrected to date

70. In the area ______the charted shoals are unlikely to be in error.

A. where hydrographic information is still sparse B. where the source data are old，incomplete or of poor quality C. away from well-established routes

D. where new hydrographic survey information has just been incorporated in the charts

71. If the information provided by a chart covering an area where a new hydrographic survey has just been carried out has still some error as regards position，least depth and extent of shoals，the most probable reason is that ______ .

A. the survey did not discover the shoals there B. the survey was incomplete or of poor quality

C. the survey was made away from well-established routes

D. the survey information has not yet been fully incorporated in the chart 72. This passage is most likely extracted from ______ of NM.

A. Section I - Explanatory Notes

B. Section II - Updates to Standard Navigational Charts

C. Section III - Reprints of Radio Navigational Warnings D. Section IV - Amendments to Admiralty Sailing Directions

第二组：

The overall concept upon which the GMDSS is based is that all ships will carry an Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon (EPIRB). EPIRBs are designed to alert a shore Rescue Co-ordination Centre (RCC)，via a satellite link，in the event of an emergency. They can be operated both manually and automatically. They will also provide the identity and approximate position of the ship in distress. The RCC will then use modern communications to discover what ships are in the vicinity and marshal appropriate resources to provide assistance. For this purpose the GMDSS establishes Distress and Safety Communications which will be used by ships. These include VHF，MF，HF and satellite services. In addition，the GMDSS establishes broadcast systems for the transmission and automatic receipt of Maritime Safety Information (MSI). This includes Navigational Warnings，Meteorological Warnings，Meteorological Forecasts，Initial Distress Alerts and other urgent information.

73. In the event of an emergency，RCC will ______.

A. arrange appropriate resources in the vicinity to provide assistance B. try to prohibit ships in the vicinity from providing any assistance C. investigate the case to see if it is necessary to provide assistance

D. communicate to the ship in distress all Navigational Warnings，Meteorological Warnings，Meteorological Forecasts，Initial Distress Alerts and other urgent information

74. In an emergency case，which of the following relationships seems to be logical in the GMDSS

communication? A. Ship in distress  satellite  RCC  salving ship B. Satellite  RCC  ship in distress  salving ship C. RCC  satellite  ship in distress  salving ship D. Salving ship  RCC  satellite  ship in distress

75. Which of the following is not true concerning the advantages in using the GMDSS system?

A. The identity of the ship in distress will be provided by EPIRB

B. The assistance in detail required by the ship in distress can be provided by EPIRB C. Appropriate arrangements can be made to assist the ship in distress

D. The approximate position of the ship in distress will be provided by RCC to all ships in vicinity

76. Which of the following is true concerning the use of GMDSS?

A. In the Distress and Safety Communications，VHF，MF and HF are prohibited.

B. GMDSS can only receive Distress and Safety information，but not transmit any information to

other mobile stations or stations ashore C. Navigational Warnings，Meteorological Warnings，Meteorological Forecasts and Initial Distress Alerts are considered to be Maritime Safety Information D. EPIRBs can only be operated manually

三．中译英（共5题，请将答案写在答题纸上）

77．在手操舵和自动舵的转换中，值班驾驶员应亲自操作或监督舵工进行转换操作。 78．所有在船人员必须每人拥有一件经主管当局认可符合SOLAS公约规定的救生衣。 79．（航海日志）1520抵达指定压载水交换位置，所有压载舱开始换水。密切注意该过程。 80．（航海日志）1600检查甲板货发现冷藏集装箱压缩机不工作。通知机舱急修。 81．（航海日志）1220与港口国主管机关港口设施保安员联系，确定船舶保安等级为2。

题号--答案 1--A 6--A 11--D 16--C 21--C 26--A 31--C 36--C 41--C 46--B 51--D 56--A 61--A 66--B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.

题号--答案 2--B 7--B 12--D 17--A 22--C 27--B 32--C 37--D 42--B 47--C 52--A 57--D 62--A 67--D 题号--答案 3--B 8--B 13--C 18--C 23--A 28--B 33--D 38--D 43--D 48--D 53--D 58--C 63--D 68--D 题号--答案 4--D 9--A 14--B 19--A 24--A 29--A 34--C 39--A 44--A 49--D 54--A 59--D --B 69-72--ADDA 题号--答案 5--D 10--A 15--D 20--D 25--C 30--B 35--B 40--A 45--B 50--B 55--B 60--C 65--D 73-76--AABC

单套结用于临时在绳子的末端成型一个眼

对于围绕江河中弯头的最大水深，你应驾驶船舶航行 来自油船溢油所导致的浮油是漂浮在海面上的油

浮力衡量一艘船的 Pan-Pan被用于通告紧急信息

公共广播系统：重要信息自中心，大多数在驾驶台通过在船的客舱，餐厅等和甲板上的喇叭能够被广播的系统定义为 锚在海底移动一控制船舶的运动定义为 船上一个由底层向上一直通到甲板的内部梯子的装臵被称为 载重线标志的MBDD什么意思？ 应急海锚能够通过使用 未满液体舱室的增加致使的上升 所有回声测深仪能够测量 木棉救生衣不应 假如没有被接上管子，船上的每一个低速喷嘴均必须被存储被用于接上灭火水龙带的消防栓旁边

在船上的消防演习当中，什么动作被要求？ 气胀式救生筏应使用被吊回船上

假如磁罗经除地球磁场外不受任何的其他的磁场影响，哪一陈述是正确的？

舵令把定的意思是 穿越钓钩口放臵绑索以防止属具滑落钓钩称为 在货船吊杆系统中，安全索是

船舶内部的力致使船舶左右舷的吃水不同。这种不同叫做

在小角度倾斜中，当存在外力时，浮力被假想为通过浮心垂直向上作用并通过

27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. . 65. 66. 67. 68.

请告诉我你船主机自全速前进到全速倒车 获得船位的普通方法是 为了有时有必要船首尾系两个浮筒

单绑头缆和倒缆意思是 一双车船使用双车前进掉头，将更易于向右舷掉头假如 每一艘船在接近或进入港口时应升起

当船舶搁浅时，则 从中海员能够了解潮汐资料

一连串伴有较强不定风的短暂阵雨可能发生在沿着或在前一段距离 虽然有时热带风暴移动得比船缓慢，但如果它在船之后，则可能陷入其中 假如你的气象报告显示有一低压区域的中心正好在你船位臵以东100海里，在南半球你将预计是什么风？ 时云的形成最小

热带幅合区在菲律宾南部正越过苏禄群岛北边的棉兰老岛和巴拉望岛。这一段落很可能是下的内容

发现新的危险，变化或助航设施的故障，船长应立即通知 关于助航设施的严重缺陷或重要变化，首先通过给航海者 在英版海图修订版中，被最先改正

在海图上，灯塔的灯光特性被显示为白和红的扇区。红扇区 液化石油气固有的一个主要危险是 海员手册关于海图的使用的一些建议 一般地，用于画大洋航线，用于港口，内陆水域和沿岸区域 在一个特定的港口，你可以在中找到低潮后的平流时刻 航海中的流向意思是指

一条平行于York河进口航道的洋红色长短虚线标记为

海图依据而被频繁改正 引水检疫锚地Damen岛和Qingshan岛之间，通过给出的点的线确定 航海者穿越主航道被推荐以穿越、 SWEEP INT在雷达面板上是的缩写

你船系泊的地区被预报有风暴天气。为了安全你应 在确定是否存在碰撞危险，有时这样的危险可能存在即使当方位有明显变化，特别是接近时

由于测量数据的老旧，这张海图上立标的位臵和数量变得不 缩写词PPI在Sperry避碰系统中的意思是 国防演习计划可能导致电子助航设备的运作暂时关闭

磁差的年变化量是0.2度 罗经的自差是由于引起的

规则最早什么时候允许直航船采取行动以避免碰撞？

当在航道中航行时，你应保持在

在狭水道中你打算追越他船。当你接近他船船尾时